Handleiding Marantz SR-7001 (pagina 11 van 79) (Engels)

6586

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/79

Pagina verder

Model SR7001/SR8001 User Guide

AV Surround Receiver

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”

within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufﬁ cient magnitude to constitute

a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG

TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA

LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE

DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV (Cable-TV) system installer’s attention to Section 820-40 of

the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, speciﬁ es that the cable ground

shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-

its are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential instal-

lation. This equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio communica-

tions. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation. If

this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be deter-

mined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user

is encouraged to try to correct the interference by

one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment

and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is con-

nected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

NOTE:

Changes or modiﬁ cations not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IMPORTANT SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS

READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT

This product was designed and manufactured to

meet strict quality and safety standards. There are,

however, some installation and operation precau-

tions which you should be particularly aware of.

1. Read Instructions – All the safety and

operating instructions should be read before

the product is operated.

2. Retain Instructions – The safety and

operating instructions should be retained for

future reference.

3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product

and in the operating instructions should be

adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use

instructions should be followed.

5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid

cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp

cloth for cleaning.

6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not

recommended by the product manufacturer

as they may cause hazards.

7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product

near water-for example, near a bath tub,

wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a

wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and

the like.

8. Accessories – Do not place this product on

an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or

table. The product may fall, causing serious

injury to a child or adult, and serious damage

to the product. Use only with a cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the

manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any

mounting of the product should follow the

manufacturer’s instructions, and should use

a mounting accessory recommended by the

manufacturer.

9. A product and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

product and cart combination to overturn.

10. Ven tilation – Slots and openings in the

cabinet are provided for ventilation and to

ensure reliable operation of the product and

to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered.

The openings should never be blocked by

placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or

other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a

bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is

provided or the manufacturer’s instructions

have been adhered to.

11. Power Sources – This product should be

operated only from the type of power source

indicated on the marking label. If you are

not sure of the type of power supply to your

home, consult your product dealer or local

power company. For products intended to

operate from battery power, or other sources,

refer to the operating instructions.

12. Grounding or Polarization – This product

may be equipped with a polarized

alternatingcurrent line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will

ﬁ t into the power outlet only one way. This is

a safety feature. If you are unable to insert

the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the

plug. If the plug should still fail to ﬁ t, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete

outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of

the polarized plug.

AC POLARIZED PLUG

13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords

should be routed so that they are not likely

to be walked on or pinched by items placed

upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit

from the product.

14. Protective Attachment Plug – The product

is equipped with an attachment plug having

overload protection. This is a safety feature.

See Instruction Manual for replacement or

resetting of protective device. If replacement

of the plug is required, be sure the service

technician has used a replacement plug

specified by the manufacturer that has the

same overload protection as the original plug.

15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside

antenna or cable system is connected to the

product, be sure the antenna or cable system

is grounded so as to provide some protection

against voltage surges and built-up static

charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical

Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information

with regard to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the

lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge unit,

size of grounding conductors, location

of antennadischarge unit, connection to

grounding electrodes, and requirements for

the grounding electrode. See Figure 1.

16. L ightning – For added protection for this

product during a lightning storm, or when it is

left unattended and unused for long periods

of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This

will prevent damage to the product due to

lightning and power-line surges.

17. Po w e r Lines – An outside antenna system

should not be located in the vicinity of

overhead power lines or other electric light or

power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an

outside antenna system, extreme care should

be taken to keep from touching such power

lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets,

extension cords, or integral convenience

receptacles as this can result in a risk of ﬁ re

or electric shock.

19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects

of any kind into this product through openings

as they may touch dangerous voltage points

or short-out parts that could result in a ﬁ re or

electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind

on the product.

20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this

product yourself as opening or removing

covers may expose you to dangerous voltage

or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualiﬁ ed service personnel.

21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this

product from the wall outlet and refer

servicing to qualiﬁ ed service personnel under

the following conditions:

a. When the power-supply cord or plug is

damaged.

b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have

fallen into the product.

c. If the product has been exposed to rain or

water.

d. If the product does not operate normally by

following the operating instructions. Adjust

only those controls that are covered by

the operating instructions as an improper

adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive

work by a qualiﬁ ed technician to restore the

product to its normal operation.

e. If the product has been dropped or damaged

in any way, and

f. When the product exhibits a distinct change

in performance this indicates a need for

service.

22. Replacement Parts – When replacement

parts are required, be sure the service

technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the

same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in ﬁ re,

electric shock, or other hazards.

23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any

service or repairs to this product, ask the

service technician to perform safety checks

to determine that the product is in proper

operating condition.

24. W all or Ce ili ng Mounting – The product

should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only

as recommended by the manufacturer.

25. Heat – The product should be situated away

from heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other products (including

ampliﬁ ers) that produce heat.

FIGURE 1

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA 70

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme

à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA

LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

ENGLISH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................38

BASIC OPERATION (PLAY BACK) .....40

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ...................................40

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ...........................40

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................40

NIGHT MODE ...................................................................40

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)

CONTROL ........................................................................40

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE .....................40

VIDEO CONVERT ............................................................41

I/P CONVERT ...................................................................41

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................41

USING THE SLEEP TIMER .............................................41

SURROUND MODE .............................42

SURROUND .....................................................................42

SOURCE DIRECT ...........................................................42

PURE DIRECT ................................................................42

OTHER FUNCTION ..............................46

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION ........................................46

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................46

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

.........................46

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE .........................................46

VIDEO ON/OFF ................................................................46

DISPLAY MODE ...............................................................47

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR

DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ...................................................47

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE .............................47

SPEAKER A/B ..................................................................48

7.1 CH INPUT ...................................................................48

AUX2 INPUT .....................................................................48

LIP.SYNC ..........................................................................48

BASIC OPERATION (TUNER) .............49

LISTENING TO THE TUNER ...........................................49

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................50

LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO ..........................52

SEARCH MODE ...............................................................53

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................54

INTRODUCTION ....................................2

PRECAUTIONS ......................................2

DESCRIPTION .......................................2

FEATURES .............................................5

ACCESSORIES ......................................5

FRONT PANEL ......................................6

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ...........................................7

REAR PANEL .........................................8

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC8001SR ...9

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ................................................9

LCD INDICATORS ............................................................10

REMOTE CONTROL RANGE .........................................11

LOADING BATTERIES .....................................................11

BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL ...........................11

SETTING THE TIME ........................................................11

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO SR7001

....12

CONNECTIONS ...................................13

SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................13

CONNECTING SPEAKERS .............................................13

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS ..........................14

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS ..........................16

ADVANCED CONNECTING ............................................17

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS .........17

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS .................18

XM RADIO OVERVIEW ...................................................19

CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY

ANTENNA .........................................................................19

CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM ........................20

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT .............................21

SETUP ..................................................22

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM .........................22

1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................24

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP ..........................................27

3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................33

4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................35

5 PREFERENCE ............................................................36

MULTI ROOM SYSTEM .......................56

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM

OUT TERMINALS .............................................................56

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI SPEAKER

TERMINALS .....................................................................56

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH

THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A .....................57

REMOTE CONTROLLER

OPERATION ....................................58

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................58

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................60

PROGRAMMING MACROS ............................................63

CLONE MODE ..................................................................65

SETUP ..............................................................................66

TROUBLESHOOTING .........................67

HDMI .................................................................................68

TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................68

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..........69

DIMENSIONS ......................................69

SETUP CODES .......................................I

DIRECT BUTTON FUNCTIONS .......... VI

ENGLISH

DESCRIPTION

THX

is an exclusive set of standards and

technologies established by the world-renowned ﬁ lm

production company, Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. THX resulted

from George Lucas’ desire to reproduce the movie

soundtrack as faithfully as possible both in the movie

theater and in the home theater.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from a movie theater

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur.

When the THX mode of the SR7001 is on, three

distinct THX technologies are automatically added:

Re-Equalization-restores the correct tonal balance

for watching a movie in a home environment.

These sounds are otherwise mixed to be brighter

for a large movie theater. Re-EQ compensates for

this and prevents the soundtracks from being overly

bright and harsh when played in a home theater.

Timbre Matching-ﬁ lters the information going to the

surround speakers so they more closely match the

tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the

front speakers.

This ensures seamless panning between the front

and surround speakers.

Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes one

surround channel’s time and phase relationship with

respect to the other surround channel.

This expands the listening position and creates with

only two surround speakers the same spacious

surround experience as in a movie theater with

multiple surround speakers.

The Marantz SR7001 was required to pass a rigorous

series of quality and performance tests, in addition to

incorporating the technologies explained above, in

order to be THX certiﬁ ed by Lucasﬁ lm Ltd.

THX requirements cover every aspect of performance

including pre-amplifier and power amplifier

performance and operation, and hundreds of other

parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

Movies which have been encoded in Dolby Digital,

DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono will all

beneﬁ t from the THX mode when being viewed.

The THX mode should only be activated when

watching movies which were originally produced for

a movie theater environment.

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR7001

Surround receiver.

This remarkable component has been engineered

to provide you with many years of home theater

enjoyment. Please take a few minutes to read this

manual thoroughly before you connect and operate

the SR7001.

As there are a number of connection and conﬁ guration

options, you are encouraged to discuss your own

particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V

specialist dealer.

This user guide covers the SR7001 and

SR8001, though the SR7001 is given for the

title. Explanations of features belonging

only to the SR8001 are indicated as “SR8001

only”.

XM Satellite Radio Ready

The XM name and related logos are registered

trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

PRECAUTIONS

DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES

To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the SR7001

where it is:

• Exposed to direct sunlight.

• Near sources of heat such as heaters.

•

In highly humid or poorly ventilated environments.

• Dusty.

• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.

• On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable

surfaces.

• In locations such as in cramped audio racks

where radiated heat is blocked. To ensure proper

heat radiation, ensure the below clearance from

walls and other equipment.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

Left

8 inchs (20 cm)

or more

Above

8 inchs (20 cm)

or more

Right

8 inchs (20 cm)

or more

Rear

8 inchs (20 cm)

or more

THX need not be activated for music, movies

made especially for TV, or shows such as sports

programming, talk shows, etc.

This is because they were originally mixed for a small

room environment.

THX and Select 2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX

may be registered in some jurisdictions. Surround

EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with

permission.

THX Surround EX—Dolby DIgital Surround EX is a

joint development of Dolby Laboratories and THX

Ltd.

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra channel which has

been added during the mixing of the program. This

channel, called Surround Back, places sounds

behind the listener in addition to the currently

available front left, front center, front right, surround

right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This

additional channel provides the opportunity for more

detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more

depth, spacious ambience and sound localization

than ever before.

Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital

Surround EX technology, when released into the

home consumer market may exhibit wording to that

effect on the packaging. A list of movies created

using this technology can be found on the Dolby

web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD

software titles encoded with this technology an be

found at www.thx.com.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the

THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround

EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology

in the home. This product may also engage the

THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1

channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround

EX eocnded. In such case, the information delivered

to the Surround Back channel will be program

dependent and may or may not be very pleasing

depending on the particular soundtrack and the

tastes of the individual listener.

“SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Dolby

Laboratories. Used under authorization.

ENGLISH

Neo:6 offers several important improvements as

follow,

• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of

matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users

with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and ﬁ ve

separate channels, respectively, corresponding to

the standard home-theater speaker layouts.

• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements

within a channel or channels to be steered

separately, and in a way which follows naturally

from the original presentation.

• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo

nonmatrix recordings into the ﬁ ve- or six-channel

layout, in a way which does not diminish the subtlety

and integrity of the original stereo recording.

DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel

digital signal format developed by Digital Theater

Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with

the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-

ES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360-

degree surround impression and space expression

thanks to further expanded surround signals. This

format has been used professionally in movie

theaters since 1999.

In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,

SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also

offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround

playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES

Extended Surround includes two signal formats with

different surround signal recording methods, as DTS-

ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES and “Neo:6” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at

44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-

bit for some time, and there is increasing interest

in higher sampling rates both for recording and for

delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide

extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates

allow wider frequency response and the use of anti-

alias and reconstruction ﬁ lters with more favorable

aural characteristics.

DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be

encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video

titles.

When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to

deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in

two channels, and with serious limitations on picture.

This capability has had little use.

DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a

new player is needed, and only analog outputs are

provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters

and analog electronics provided in the player.

DTS 96/24 offers the following:

1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master.

2. Full backward compatibility with all existing

decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz

signal)

3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried

on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio,

accessible to all DVD players.

4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video, for music programs and motion

picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

“DTS” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital

Theater Systems, Inc.

Dolby Digital identiﬁ es the use of Dolby Digital audio

coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV.

As with ﬁ lm sound, Dolby Digital can provide up

to ﬁ ve full-range channels for left, center, and right

screen channels, independent left and right surround

channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency

effects.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

is an improved matrix

decoding technology that provides better spatiality

and directionality on Dolby Surround program

material; provides a convincing three-dimensional

soundﬁ eld on conventional stereo music recordings;

and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience

to automotive sound. While conventional surround

programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround

Pro Logic

decoders, soundtracks will be able to be

encoded speciﬁ cally to take full advantage of Pro

Logic

playback, including separate left and right

surround channels. (Such material is also compatible

with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)

Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done

using a matrix decoder that derives three surround

channels from the two in the original recording. For

best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with

movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital

Surround EX.

About Dolby Pro Logic II x

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural

and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience

to the home theater environment. A product of

Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix

decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a

complete surround sound solution that maximizes

the entertainment experience from stereo as well as

5.1-channel encoded sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby

Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally

decode the thousands of commercially available

Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and

television programs with enhanced depth and

spatiality. It can also process any high-quality

stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music

content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening

experience.

The Dolby Headphone technology provides a

surround sound listening experience over headphones.

When listening to multichannel content such as DVD

movies over headphones, the listening experience

is fundamentally different than listening to speakers.

Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering

the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs

greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby

utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to

solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing,

immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby

Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from

stereo material.

THX Select2

Before any home theater component can be THX

Select2 certiﬁ ed, it must pass a rigorous series of

quality and performance tests. Only then can a

product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your

guarantee that the Home Theater products you

purchase will give you superb performance for many

years to come. THX Select2 requirements deﬁ ne

hundreds of parameters, including power ampliﬁ er

performance, and pre-ampliﬁ er performance and

operation for both digital and analog domains. THX

Select2 receivers also feature proprietary THX

technologies

(e.g., THX Mode) which accurately translate movie

soundtracks for home theater playback.

DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels

of discrete digital audio into home theater systems.

DTS brings you premium quality discrete multichannel

digital sound to both movies and music.

DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to

create full range digital sound reproduction.

The no compromise DTS digital process sets the

standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering

an exact copy of the studio master recordings to

neighborhood and home theaters.

Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as

the moviemaker intended.

DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or

music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered

trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The advantages of discrete multichannel systems

over matrix are well known.

But even in homes equipped for discrete multichannel,

there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding.

This is because of the large library of matrix surround

motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape;

and analog television broadcasts.

The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center

channel and a mono surround channel from two-

channel matrix stereo material. It is better than a

simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to

improve separation, but because of its mono, band-

limited surround it can be disappointing to users

accustomed to discrete multichannel.

ENGLISH

Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified

by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized

surround sound experience from two speakers using

a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally,

Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround

sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby

Pro Logic II.

Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original

Multichannel audio information and provides the

listener with the sensation of being surrounded by

additional speakers.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-

D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile

multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable

up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback

from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other

matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder

extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a

LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a

listening environment that places the listener “inside”

music performances and dramatically improves

both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded

video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear

channels to greatly improve separation and image

positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to

both audio and A/V productions.

CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog

clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass

enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog

to become clearer and more discernable in movies

and it enables the bass frequencies contained in

the original programming to more closely achieve

low frequencies–overcoming the low frequency

limitations of the speakers by full octave.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass

technology are incorporated under license from SRS

Labs, Inc.

HDCD

(High Deﬁ nition Compatible Digital

) is a

patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the

full richness and details of the original microphone

feed.

HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are

encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as

compared to 16-bits for all other CDs.

HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD

format by using a sophisticated system to encode

the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining

completely compatible with the CD format.

When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more

dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and

extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With

HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the

original performance not a ﬂ at, digital imitation.

HDCD system manufactured under license from

Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more

of the following: In the United States 5,479,168

5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600

5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with

other patents pending.

HDMI, the and High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC.

There are several factors that can degrade the sound

from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room.

One of the most important is the interaction of sound

from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as

walls, the ﬂ oor, and the ceiling in the room. Even

with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical

treatments, there are signiﬁ cant problems that are

caused by room acoustics. These include reﬂ ections

from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are

created between large parallel surfaces in the room.

In a home theater the situation is further complicated

because there are several listening locations. The

effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at

each person’s ears are very different and the result is

a listening experience that is degraded in a different

way for every person in the room. It is not uncommon

to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as

large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range

below 250 Hz.

The solution to this problem is to apply room correction

after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker

interacts with the room. Because the room causes

variations in the frequency response of the

loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it

is important to measure each loudspeaker at several

locations in the listening room. This should be done

even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a

single location is not representative of the acoustical

problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade

overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is the only

technology that can achieve room correction for

multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so

by combining the data collected at several points in

the room from each loudspeaker and then applying

correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of

the room and is matched to the frequency resolution

of human perception (known as psychoacoustics).

Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both

in frequency and time domains and so there are

no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal

ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional

methods of room equalization.

In addition to correcting frequency response problems

over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ

provides a completely automated sound system set-

up process. It identiﬁ es how many loudspeakers are

connected to the ampliﬁ ers and whether they are full-

range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least one

subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ determines

the optimum crossover frequency between each

satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically

checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts

the user if there are any that may be wired out-

of-phase relative to the others. It measures the

distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening

position and adjusts the delays so that sound from

each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally,

Audyssey MuitEQ determines the playback level of

each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so

that all levels are equal.

MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are

trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All rights

reserved.

ENGLISH

FEATURES

The SR7001 incorporates the latest generation of

digital surround sound decoding technology such as

Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1

and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby

Pro-Logic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-

Logic II x (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround

II (Cinema, Music and Mono).

In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By

utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-

232C communication port, the SR7001 is tomorrow’s

technology, today!

• THX Select 2 certiﬁ ed

7ch ampliﬁ ers have enough power for even the most

difﬁ cult conditions found in large rooms.

Enormous power reserves endow the system with

substantial dynamic ability at high sound levels.

110 watts (SR7001) / 125 watts (SR8001) to each of

the 7 main channels the power amp section features

an advanced, premium high-storage power supply

capacitors, and fully discrete output stages housed

in cast aluminum heat sinks .

The SR7001 incorporates the most advanced

Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a

Crystal

192 kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of

the 7 channels. Independent power supply circuits

are incorporated for the FL display, audio and

video sections for maximum separation, clarity

and dynamic range. Together with hand-selected

customized components, all elements work in

harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as the artist

had intended.

The SR7001 is designed and engineered with

extensive feedback from custom installation experts,

dealers and consumers. It features multi-room/

multisource, assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C

communication port, Flasher input, heavy duty

speaker binding posts and an extensive array of both

analog and digital inputs / outputs. With 6 assignable

digital inputs (7 total), 4 component inputs, Super

Audio CD Multi Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs,

video convert system and a speaker-B and OSD

output versatility is taken to a stunning new level.

Furthermore, the SR7001 can output the OSD

information through the Y/C (S-video) and composite

video outputs.

An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote

control allows full access to all of the operating

functions and can be used for system operation as

well.

The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish

and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of

the SR7001, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source

selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed.

The SR7001 is here to perform in your unrivaled home

entertainment setup.

• HDMI

HDMI (High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface) is an

enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)

standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting

audio signals in addition to video signals. Where

multiple cables were previously needed for audio/

video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a

single cable.

The HDMI input jacks of this receiver support HDMI

Ver. 1.2. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter

support HDMI Ver. 1.1.

Ver. 1.2 supports 1-bit audio formatting and enables

transmission of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signals

of Super Audio CD.

This receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection

technology that consists of data encoding and other

device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital

video content. Both this receiver and the connected

component (such as a video player or monitor) must

support HDCP. Before connecting a component to

this receiver, refer to its instruction manual.

• THX / THX Surround EX

• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES

(Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)

• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)

• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)

• Audyssey Mult EQ

• 7 × 110 Watts (8 Ohms), Discrete Ampliﬁ ers

(SR8001: 7 × 125 Watts)

• High Power Current Feedback Circuitry

• Massive Energy Power Supply, Huge EI

Transformer, Large ELCO’s.

• 192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 Channels

• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets

• Video Off Mode

• Large Heavy Duty Speaker Terminals for all

Channels

• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System

Control

•

Set Up Menu via all Video Output

(Composite, S-Video, Component video and

HDMI)

• Auto Input Signal Detection

• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets

• Auto Adjust Function for Speaker Distance Settings

(Delay Time)

Microphone

AC cable

AAA-size batteries × 3

AM Loop Antenna

FM Antenna

Front AUX Jack Cover

PUSH

User Guide

Warranty Card

USA × 1

Canada × 1

• Front Optical AUX Input

(Digital Camera, Portable DVD)

• Programmable, learning remote control

• Video convert system

HDMI ← Component Video ↔

S-Video ↔ Composit Video

• Video I/P Converter

• Assignable Video Input

• Lip Sync (Audio Delay)

• Digital Radio Interface (XM ready)

• Function Rename

• HDCD

• Dolby Headphone

• Bi-amp drive

• Source/Pure Direct mode

• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ

• DSD direct conversion

• DSD to PCM converter

• Two component monitor outputs

• Assignable DC Trigger Output

• Troidal Core Transformer (SR8001 only)

• Selectable Multi Room Component Video output

(SR8001 only)

• Flasher Input

• IR Recever Input (SR8001 only)

• Emitter Output (SR8001 only)

• Multi Room B output (SR8001 only)

ACCESSORIES

Remote Controller RC8001SR

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

ENGLISH

Notes:

• When using headphones, the surround mode will

change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by

MENU and Cursor button.

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting

as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the

jack.

r SURROUND MODE button

You can select the surround mode by pressing this

button.

t AUTO (Auto surround) button

Press this button to select the AUTO mode from

the surround modes. When this mode is selected,

the receiver determines the surround mode

corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.

y MULTI (Multi Room) button

Press this button to activate the Multiroom system.

“MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.

(See page 56)

POWER switch and STANDBY indicator

When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON

and the display illuminates. When pressed again, the

unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator will be

illuminated.

INPUT SELECTOR knob (AUDIO/ VIDEO)

This knob is used to select the input sources.

The video function selectors, such as TV, DVD,

VCR1, DSS and AUX1 select video and audio

simultaneously.

Audio function sources such as TAPE, CD/CDR,

TUNER and AUX2 may be selected in conjunction

with a Video source.

This feature (Sound Injection) combines a sound

from one source with a picture from another.

Choose the video source ﬁ rst, and then choose a

different audio source to activate this function.

HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones

This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s

output through a pair of headphones. Be certain

that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo

phono plug. Note that the main room speakers will

automatically be turned off when the headphone jack

is in use.

u MULTI SPEAKER button

Press this button to activate the Multiroom Speaker

system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the

display.

(See page 56)

i BAND button

Press this button to switch between FM, AM and XM

(XM Ready) in the TUNER mode.

o T-MODE button

Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or

mono mode when the FM band is selected.

The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.

(See page 49)

!0 MEMORY button

Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory

numbers or station names. (See page 50, 54)

!1 CLEAR button

Press this button to cancel the station-memory setting

mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 51, 55)

INFRARED receiving sensor window

This window receives infrared signals for the remote

control.

!3 VOLUME control knob

Adjusts the overall sound level. Turning the control

clockwise increases the sound level.

!4 AUX1 INPUT jacks

These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the

connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game

etc. When not using these jacks, protect with the

included jack covers.

How to Attach the Front AUX Jack Cover

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

S-VIDEO

DIGITAL

VIDEO

PUSH

Front AUX Jack Cover

PURE DIRECT button and indicator

When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE

DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed

again, “PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds,

the FL display indication goes out.

In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control

circuitry and bass management are bypassed.

Notes:

• The surround mode is automatically switched to

AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.

• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed

automatically as follows.

Front SPKR = LARGE

Center SPKR = LARGE

Surround SPKR = LARGE

Surround Back SPKR = LARGE

Sub woofer = YES

!6 THX button

Press this button to select THX processing for input

source.

!7 7.1CH INPUT button

Press this button to select the output of an external

multichannel player.

!8 MENU button

This button is used to enter the SETUP MAIN

MENU.

Cursor (

5, ∞,

)

/ ENTER button

Use these buttons when operating the SETUP MAIN

MENU and TUNER function.

@0 EXIT button

This button is used to exit from the SETUP MAIN

MENU.

@1 DISPLAY button

When this button is pressed, the FL display mode

is changed as Input display → Surround Mode →

Auto-display Off → Display Off → Function name

display and the display off indicator (DISP) lights up

is condition DISPLAY OFF.

@2 MultEQ button / MIC jack

Press to automatically measure speaker characteristics

using the included microphone. (See page 28)

FRONT PANEL

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MT X 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

!8 @0 @2!9

q tyur !2 !3 !4ew

!5 !6 !7 @1 @3

io!0!1

ENGLISH

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST V

–

OFF NIGHT PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR

AUTO

DISC 6.1DIRECT MTX 6.1 SPKR AB

DIGITAL

SURROUND

PCM

SL S SR

LFE

™

h k¡0 ¡1 ¡3f

j l

¡2

¡4

a DISP (Display Off) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in

the display off condition.

s SLEEP timer indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer

function in the main-room is in use.

d Multi-room system indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the multi-room

system is active.

f AUTO SURR

(Auto Surround mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO

SURROUND mode is in use.

g TUNER’s indicators

AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the

tuner’s Auto mode is in use.

TUNED : This indicator illuminates when

a station is being received with

sufﬁ cient signal strength to provide

acceptable listening quality.

ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an

FM station is being tuned into stereo

condition.

DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)

These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES

decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).

j V (video)-OFF mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF

function is active.

k NIGHT mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in

the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of

digital program material at low volume levels.

l SPKR (speaker) AB indicator

Active speaker system will be illuminated by this

indicator.

¡0 PEAK indicator

This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input

signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is

greater than the capable level of internal processing,

this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press

the ATT button on the remote. (See page 9)

¡1 ATT (Attenuation) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation

function is active.

¡2 DIGITAL Input Indicator

This indicator lights when a digital input has been

selected.

¡3 ANALOG input indicator

This indicator is illuminated when an analog input

source has been selected.

¡4 SIGNAL FORMAT indicators

2 DIGITAL

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital

signal is input.

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX

signal is input.

dts

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is

input.

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal

is input.

96/24

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal

is input.

PCM

This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is

PCM (pulse code modulation).

2 SURROUND

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround

signal is input.

¡5

ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators

These indicators display the channels that are

encoded with a digital

input signal. If the selected digital input signal is

Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”,

“SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.If the digital input

signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be

displayed.

If Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX ﬂ ag

or DTS-ES signal comes in, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” ,

“SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.

¡6 Main Information Display

This display shows messages relating to the status,

input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or

other aspects of unit’s operation.

¡7 SOURCE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in

the SOURCE DIRECT mode.

¡8 DSD indicator

This indicator illuminates when a DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) signal of an Super Audio CD is input via the

audio signal included in the HDMI input signal.

¡9 PURE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in

the PURE DIRECT mode.

™0 HDCD indicator

When HDCD signal is decoded, this indicator will

light up.

™1 HDMI indicator

This indicator illuminates when an HDMI device is

connected to the input and a link is established.

@3 SPEAKER A/B button

Press this button to select speaker systems A and/or

Opening and closing the front panel door

When you want to use the controls behind the front

panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the

lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when

not using these controls.

AV SURROUND RE

IVE

R SR7001

PHONES

MTX

X 1

DIO

S-VI

DOWN

Caution:

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁ ngers between the

door and the panel.

ENGLISH

y XM terminal

See page 19 for connecting information.

u Sub Speaker outputs terminals

(MULTI SPEAKER / SPEAKER C)

Two terminals are provided for the front left, and right

speakers for multi room.

The terminals can be used to connect a third set of

speakers by setting the SPEAKER C selector switch

to ON. For connection and use, see page 20.

i Speaker outputs terminals

Nine terminals are provided for the front (A) left, front

(A) right, front (B) left, front (B) right, front center,

surround left, surround right, surround back left and

surround back right speakers.

o SPEAKER C switch

Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this receiver or set

to OFF for normal speaker connection (surround

back and multiroom speakers). (See page 20)

!0 AC OUTLETS

Connect the AC power cables of components such as

a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED and

UNSWITCHED outlets are provided.

The one marked SWITCHED provides power only

when the SR7001 is turned on and is useful for

components which you use every time you play your

system.

The one marked UNSWITCHED is always live as

long as the SR7001 is plugged into a live outlet.

A component connected here may be left on

permanently, or may be switched off with via its own

power switch.

Caution:

• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything

plugged into these outlets should be powered up

before the SR7001 is turned on.

• The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not

connect devices that consume electricity more than

the capacity of these AC outlets. If the total power

consumption of the connected devices exceeds the

capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the power

supply.

!1 AC INLET

Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET and

then into the power outlet on the wall.

SR7001 can be powered by 120V AC only.

!2 Preamp Outputs

(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)

Jacks for L (front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL

(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround

back left) and SBR (surround back right).

Use these jacks for connection to external power

ampliﬁ ers.

!3 Subwoofer Output

Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered

subwoofer. If an external subwoofer ampliﬁ er is used,

connect this jack to the subwoofer ampliﬁ er input.

If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or

with a 2 channel subwoofer ampliﬁ er, connect a “Y”

connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one

cable from it to each subwoofer ampliﬁ er.

!4 7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT

By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD

multichannel player, or other components that has a

multichannel port, you can playback the audio with

5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.

!5 EMITTER OUT (SR8001 only)

The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals

are output to this terminal. External devices can be

controlled by connecting them to this terminal.

!6 IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 only)

Connect to an external IR receiver.

FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)

These terminals are to control the unit from each

zone. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.

!8 DC TRIGGER output terminal

Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC

under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…)

Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the

conditions by which these jack will be active.

Note:

• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is

not sufﬁ cient for drive capability.

MULTI ROOM REMOTE IN/OUT terminals

IN: Connect to a multi-room remote control

device, available from your Marantz dealer.

OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped

with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi

zone (Multi room).

REAR PANEL

e Multiroom Outputs (Audio output

A/B, Video)

These are the audio and video output jacks for the

Multi zone (Multi room).

Connect these jacks to optional audio power

ampliﬁ ers or video display devices to listen and view

the source selected by the multiroom system in a

remote room.

r MONITOR OUT

These are monitor outputs and each one includes

both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations.

When connecting two video monitors or televisions,

be aware that the OSD interface can be used with

both MONITOR OUT connections.

t RS-232C

The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with

an external controller to control the operation of the

SR7001 by using an external device.

The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to

update the operating software of the SR7001 so that

it will be able to support new digital audio formats and

the like as they are introduced.

q FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)

Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial

cable, or a cable network FM source.

AM antenna and ground terminals

Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the

terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM

loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most

areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the

best reception.

w COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/

OUTPUT

If your DVD player or other device has component

video connectors, be sure to connect them to these

component video connectors on the SR7001. The

SR7001 has 4 component video input connectors to

obtain the color information (Y, C

, C

) directly from

the recorded DVD signal or other video component

and two component video outputs connector to

output it directly into the matrix decoder of the display

device.

By sending the pure DVD component video signal

directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing

that normally would degrade the image. The result is

vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like

colors and crisp detail.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

OUT

COAX.

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OFF

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

INOUT

VCR1

ININ

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.

SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN

TER

FRONT

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

rqw u it y

o!0!1!2!4

!9@0

!8!7 !6

!5 !3

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROLLER

RC8001SR

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

z Infrared Transmitter and Learning

Sensor

This transmitter emits infrared light. Press the

buttons while pointing the transmitter towards the

infrared receiver window of the SR7001 or other

AV equipment. Be sure to also point towards other

remote controls when using the learning function.

x POWER ON and OFF buttons

(When AMP mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn the SR7001 on or

off.

c SOURCE ON/OFF button

This button is used to turn a speciﬁ c source (such as

a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest

of the system.

v M (Mode) button

This button is used to program Macros. Pressing this

button switches between Normal mode and Macro

mode.

The > button is used to move to the next page. Up to

20 programs (4 pages) can be made. Holding down

the M button for three seconds or more switches to

the Setup mode, where the Setup menu is shown on

the LCD. The Setup menu has four pages, and the >

button is used to move to the next page. Pressing the

> button from page 4 returns you to page 1.

b D1 to D5 (Direct) buttons

Five types of direct operations can be performed

for each of the 12 source buttons such as the DVD,

television, ampliﬁ er, and other AV equipment. The

pages can be switched, so 4 pages × 5 types = 20

operations can be performed for a single source. The

text display can also be changed.

n > (Page) button

This button is used to switch pages for the Direct

button. The current page is shown on the LCD.

m VOL (Volume) button

This button is used to adjust the volume for the

ampliﬁ er and television.

Note:

• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the

SR7001.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP·SYNC

THX

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

⁄1

⁄2⁄6

⁄7

⁄8

⁄9

¤0

¤1

⁄3

⁄4

⁄5

⁄0

@0 REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals

Connect to a Marantz component equipped with

remote control (RC-5) terminals.

@1 AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1,

DSS/VCR2, TAPE, CD/CDR)

These are the analog audio inputs and outputs. There

are 6 audio inputs (4 of which are linked to video

inputs) and 4 audio outputs (2 of which are linked to

video outputs). The audio jacks are nominally labeled

for cassette tape decks, compact disc players, DVD

players and etc.... The audio inputs and outputs

require RCA-type connectors.

@2 DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 6) /

OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)

These are the digital audio inputs and outputs. There

are 3 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical

jacks.

The inputs accept digital audio signals from a

compact disc, LD, DVD, or other digital source

component.

For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1

optical output.

The digital outputs can be connected to MD

recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other similar

components.

VIDEO IN/OUT

(TV, DVD, VCR1, DSS/VCR2)

These are the video inputs and outputs. There

are 4 video inputs and 2 video outputs and each

one includes both composite video and S-video

conﬁ gurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and

other video components to the video inputs.

The 2 video output channels can be used to be

connected to video tape recorders for making

recordings.

@4 HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT

This unit has 4 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output. The

input function can be selected from the OSD menu

system. (See page 15) (The SR8001 has 2 HDMI

outputs.)

, MUTE button

This button is used to mute the audio for the SR7001

and television.

Note:

• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the

SR7001.

. GUIDE button

This button is used to display the menus for the DVD

player, DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), or other

AV equipment.

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to select the LIP.SYNC mode.

⁄0 EXIT button

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to cancel settings in the setup

menu.

⁄1 Numeric buttons

These buttons are used to switch between 0 to 9

of the source components. If the source is set to

the amplifier, these buttons are used to perform

operations.

(when AMP mode is selected)

(1) TEST button

Used to enter the test tone menu.

(2) CH SEL. (channel select) button

Used to call up SETUP MAIN MENU and adjust

speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.

(3) SURR (surround) button

Used to select the surround mode.

(4) 7.1CH button

Press this button to select the output of an external multi

channel decoder.

(5) ATT button

When the input signal is too high and the voice

distorts even by throttling the SR7001 VOLUME

control, turn on this function. “ATT” is indicated when

this function is activated.

The input level is reduced. Attenuator is invalid for

use with the output signal of “REC OUT”.

Note:

• This function is unavailable during the digital input

is selected.

(6) SPK-AB button

Speaker mode is switched in the following

sequence.

A → B → A+B → off

ENGLISH

LCD INDICATORS

Information about currently selected source and

direct code names are displayed on the LCD.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

123

A Source Name indicator

This displays the name of the selected source, such

as DVD, television, or other AV equipment (up to ﬁ ve

characters).

B Direct Button Name indicator

This displays up to 20 types of button names for each

source. (up to six characters)

C Page indicator

This displays the current page position.

D Transmission indicator

This lights up when the remote control is sending a

signal.

E USE indicator

This is displayed under normal operation.

F Battery Level indicator

This is displayed when the battery level is low.

G TIMER indicator

This is displayed when the macro timer is set.

H MACRO indicator

This is displayed when the remote control is in macro

programming mode.

(7) DISP. button

Selects the display mode for the front display of the

SR7001.

(8) OSD button

When this button is pressed, the current setting are

displayed on the TV monitor.

(9) SLEEP (sleep timer) button

This button is used for setting the sleep timer. It can

be operated the same way as the button in unit.

(0) THX button

Use this button to select the THX mode.

⁄2 MEMO button

This button is used to store settings to memory or

program a source.

⁄3 CONTROL button

Thses buttons are used when operating the PLAY,

STOP, PAUSE, and other commands of a source.

Note:

• This button is unavailable for the SR7001.

⁄4 SOURCE button

Thses buttons are used to switch the source of your

A/V Receiver / amplifer. Each time a source button is

pressed, the remote control changes to the source

which was pressed.

This remote control can control 12 types of equipment.

To change the A/V Receiver / ampliﬁ er source, press

this button twice within two seconds. The signal is

sent when it is pressed the second time.

Note:

• Select the AMP as the source to use this remote

controll with the SR7001.

• The MD button does not work with the SR7001.

⁄5 LIGHT 1 and 2 buttons

Pressing these buttons will light up the LCD and its

buttons. This lighting time can be set. If the lighting

time is set to 0 seconds, the backlight turns on only

while this button is pressed. The operations for

LIGHT 1 and 2 are identical.

⁄6 CLEAR button

This button is used to erase the memory or program

of a source.

⁄7 MENU button

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN

MENU of the SR7001.

⁄8 PREV (Previous) button

This button is used to return to the previous channel

on the television or other device.

Note:

• This button is unavailable for SR7001.

⁄9 CH (Channel) button

This is used to change channels.

¤0 CURSOR buttons

These buttons are used when controlling the cursor

of the SR7001, DVD, or other AV equipment.

¤1 LCD

Information about the sources and modes are shown

on the LCD.

I NAME indicator

This is displayed when the remote control is in

renaming mode.

J LEARN indicator

This is displayed when the remote control is in

learning mode.

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROL RANGE

The distance between the transmitter of the remote

control and the IR SENSOR of the SR7001 should be

less than 5 meters. If the remote control is pointed in

a direction other than the IR SENSOR or if there is

an obstacle between them, use of the remote control

may not be possible.

Remote-controllable range

LEC

LEA

CD-

MUTE

-A

LIG

nin

g Rem

ote

Contr

60°

Approx. 5 m

LOADING BATTERIES

The life of the batteries used with the remote control

is about 4 months with normal use. Also be sure to

replace batteries earlier when you notice that they are

getting weak.

Remove the back cover.

Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct

and polarity.

Close the cover until it clicks.

CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES

• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote control

unit.

• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.

• If the remote control unit does not operate from

close to the main unit, replace the batteries with

new ones, even if less then a year has passed.

• The included battery is only for verifying operation.

Replace it with a new battery as soon as

possible.

• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in

the proper direction, following the + and - marks in

the remote control unit’s battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or battery ﬂ uid leakage:

- Do not use a new battery with an old one.

- Do not use two different types of batteries.

- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or

dispose of batteries in ﬂ ames.

• Remove the batteries when not planning to use

the remote control unit for a long period of time.

• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the

ﬂ uid from the inside of the battery compartment,

then insert new batteries.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply

with governmental regulations or environmental

public instruction’s rules that apply in your country

or area.

Remote control unit (RC8001SR)

SR7001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL

Under normal usage, alkaline batteries last

approximately four months. When the batteries wear

out, a battery mark is displayed on the LCD. Although

the remote control can still be used when the battery

mark is displayed, the batteries should be replaced

as soon as possible. The LCD eventually starts to

ﬂ ash when buttons are pressed, the remote control

will be unable to transmit signals or learn codes.

• This remote control uses non-volatile memory so

that the learned codes and macro programs are

retained even if the batteries are removed.

Reset the clock after replacing the batteries.

Safety Precautions for Batteries

Be sure to always observe the following precautions

to prevent ﬂ uid leakage, overheating, ﬁ re, breakage,

accidental ingestion, and other accidents.

• If the batteries are left unused for a long period

of time, the battery ﬂ uid may leak or the batteries

may corrode.

• Do not use the batteries in the remote control with

the plus and minus polarity reversed.

•

Do not attempt to recharge, heat, or disassemble

the batteries. Do not put the batteries in a ﬁ re.

• Do not use the remote control with old batteries or

worn-out batteries inserted.

• Do not use different types of batteries or mix old

and new batteries in the remote control.

• If the remote control is not operating properly,

replace the batteries with new ones.

• If any of the batteries are leaking, completely wipe

up all leaked battery ﬂ uid, and then replace the

batteries with new ones.

SETTING THE TIME

Example: Setting to 6:20PM (18:20)

When you bought this remote control and insert the

batteries to the remote control at ﬁ rst, the steps 1 to

3 are skipped.

Starts from step 4 to set the time.

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button once.

This displays second page (SETUP).

Press the D4 (CLOCK) direct button.

The “ ” indicator blinks and the clock indicator

displays “0:00”.

Press the 1 and 8 numeric button to set the

hour indicator.

The hour indicator displays “18”.

The minute indicator blinks “_”.

Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the

minute indicator.

The minute indicator displays “20”.

The hour indicator blinks.

Press the OK cursor button to start the clock.

The clock starts from 0 second at the time that was

set and return to normal (USE) mode.

Whenever the batteries are replaced, the clock

shows 00:00. Please reset the clock. (The time

setting is not backed up.)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

USE

PAG E

USE

PAG E

LEARN

5 6

3 4

1 2

USE

PAG E

ENGLISH

TUNER MODE

AMP MODE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

2 31

5 64

8 97

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

LIP.SYNC

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

TUNER

GUIDE

MEMO

CLEAR

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

8 97

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

THX

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

TAPE

DSS

AUX2

AUX1

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

AMP

VOL

EXIT

MUTE

USE

PAGE

123

CHECKING THE TIME

To check the time, hold down the > button for three

seconds or more. The current time is displayed for

ﬁ ve seconds.

Note:

• Although the remote control uses a quartz clock,

the time may become out of sync over the course of

operation. Be sure to correct the clock from time to

time.

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO

SR7001

To control the SR7001 by your RC8001SR, you have

to select the device AMP or TUNER by pressing the

function selector button. Please refer below for the

details in AMP and TUNER mode.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the SR7001 on and off

POWER ON Turns the SR7001 on

POWER OFF Turns the SR7001 off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

VOL +/- Adjust the over all sound level

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily

Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode

OK Enter the SETUP MENU

Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode

MENU Enter the SETUP MENU

EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU

TEST (1) Enter the test tone menu

CH.SEL (2) Call up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch

input setup

SURR (3) Selects the surround mode

7.1CH (4) Selects the 7.1CH IN

ATT (5) Reduces the input level

SPK-AB (6) Selects the speaker system

DISP (7) Changes the front display mode

OSD (8) Displays the current setting on the monitor

SLEEP (9) Sets the sleep timer function

THX (0) Selects the THX mode

Function selector Selects a particular source component

GUIDE / LIP.SYNC Selects the LIP.SYNC mode

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

CH +/- Selects a preset station up and down

GUIDE Selects the “Frequency direct input”

0–9 Input the numeric

MEMO Enter the tuner preset memory numbers

CLEAR Clears the inputting

TUNER Selects a frequency band

ENGLISH

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7-

speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,

a center speaker, surround left and right speakers,

a surround back left and right speakers, and a

subwoofer.

For best results we recommend that all front speakers

be of the same type, with identical or similar driver

units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front

sound stage as the action moves from side to side.

Your center channel speaker is very important as

over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture

emanates from the center channel.

It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the

main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not

be identical to the front channel speakers, but they

should be of high quality.

The surround center speaker is useful for playback

of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of

the beneﬁ ts of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that

surround channels are discrete full range, while they

were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type

systems.

Bass effects are an important part of home theater.

For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used

as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If

you have full range front speakers, however, they

may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper

setting of the switches in the menu system.

90°

110°

22°

30°

135°

150°

0°

Front left and right speakers

We recommend to set the front L and R speakers

with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.

Center speaker

Align the front line of the center speaker with the front

L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little

backward from the line.

Surround left and right speakers

When the SR7001 is used in surround operation,

the preferred location for surround speakers is on

the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the

listening position.

The center of the speaker should face into the

room.

Surround back left and right speakers

Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1-

channel system is installed.

Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the

listening position.

The center of the speaker should face into the

room.

Subwoofer

We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum

bass effect. Sub-woofer bears only low frequency range

so you can place it any where in the room.

HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS

Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker

Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the

three front speakers at the same height, as best as

possible.

Surround left and right speakers, and surround

back speaker

Place the surround left, right and surround back

speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m.

Also place the speakers at the same height, as best

as possible.

70cm

Note:

• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left,

right and the center speakers when the speakers are

installed near the TV and the TV is a monitor type.

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.

SURR BACK

: MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B

MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN

TER

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

COAX.

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OFF

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

INOUT

VCR1

ININ

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUTDIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

SURROUND

BACK

PRE

OUT

INVERT

OUTPUT

INPUT

LEVEL

BTL REMOTE CONT.EXT. CONT. IN

VIDEO/

+5~13V DC

SYSTEM OUT O UT

INPUT

MASTERSLAVE

MIN MAX

SPEAKER SYSTEM

MINIMUM 4 OHMS

Powered

subwoofer

Power

Ampliﬁ er

Passive

subwoofer

Surround

Right Left

FRONT A

Surround

BACK

Center

Right

Left

CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE

Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire

insulation.

Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent short

circuits.

Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.

Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole in

side of each terminal.

Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to

secure the wire.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

3/8 inch

(10 mm)

Front Right

Front Left

Front Center

Surround Left

Subwoofer

Surround Back

Left

Surround Right

Surround Back

Right

Left

FRONT B

Right

Left

ENGLISH

Caution:

•

Be sure to use speakers with the speciﬁ ed impedance as

shown on the rear panel of this unit.

•

To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare

speaker wires touch each other and do not let them

touch any metal part

of this unit.

• Do not touch the

speaker terminals

when the power is

on. It may cause

you to receive an

electric shocks.

• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one

speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.

Note:

•

Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for

the speaker properly. If they are miss-connected, the

signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will

be corrupted.

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect a

powered subwoofer (power ampliﬁ er built in ).

If your subwoofer is a passive type (power ampliﬁ er

is not built in), connect a monaural power ampliﬁ er to

the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack and connect the

subwoofer to the ampliﬁ er.

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS

OUT

TAPE

CD/CDR

OUT

DIGITAL IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

COAX.

OUT

LMULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

INOUT

VCR1

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL OUTDIGITAL OUT

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-23

OUT IN

DIGITAL

INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OUT IN

L R

RL RL

R L

R L R L

L R

The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and

the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal

which is currently selected.

Caution:

• Do not connect this unit and other components

to mains power until all connections between

components have been completed.

Notes:

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete

connections may make noise.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels

properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect input and output properly.

• Refer to the instructions for each component that is

connected to this unit.

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with

power cords and speaker cables this will result in

generating a hum or other noise.

CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS

• There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and

3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use

these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS

bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital

source components.

• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one

optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks

can be connected to a CD recorder-, or a MD deck

inputs, respectively.

• Refer to the instructions for each component. To

setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or

other digital source’s connected to digital input

jacks.

• Use ﬁ ber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3

input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for

digital audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks.

• You can designate the input for each digital input/

output jacks according to your component. See

page 25.

CD recorder / MD deck

Tape Deck

Analog Audio

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

Notes:

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an

external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder

when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack

of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The digital signal jacks on the SR7001 conform

to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does

not conform to this standard, the SR7001 may not

function properly.

• Each type of audio jack works independently.

Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are

output through the corresponding digital and analog

jacks, respectively.

ENGLISH

HDMI JACK

This SR7001 has four HDMI inputs and one HDMI

output (The SR8001 has two HDMI outputs.). It can

send digital video and audio signals from DVDs and

other sources directly to a display. It minimizes signal

degradation caused by analog conversion so that high

quality images can be enjoyed.

The SR7001 is also capable of converting analog

video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component

Video) for HDMI output.

Select an input source from the OSD menu system.

(See page 25, 36)

Notes:

• When the HDMI output is connected to a display

monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not

output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to

connect to a display that supports HDCP.

• There may be no image output if connected to a

TV or display that is not compatible with the above

format.

• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display to

be connected to the SR7001 for detailed information

regarding the HDMI terminal.

* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

CONNECTING HDMI DEVICES

An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the

HDMI jack on the SR7001 with the HDMI jack on a DVD

player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit

multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player

must support multichannel audio transmission through

its HDMI jack.

HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in

principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV

or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI

conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI

terminal, connect the audio signal separately.

Notes:

• Some HDMI components can be controlled over the

HDMI cable, but this receiver cannot control other

components this way.

• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,

etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio

are not output.

• DVI cables come with 24-pin and 29-pin plugs. This

receiver supports 24-pin DVI-D cables; 29-pin DVI

cables cannot connect to it.

• Some source devices such as DVD players or set

top box do not support HDMI repeater operations

like those of the SR7001. In such case, pictures are

not properly projected on monitors such as TVs and

projectors.

DVD player VIDEO PROJECTOR

• When multiple components are connected to this

receiver, turn power to unused components off to

prevent interference between them.

• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power

on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off

before disconnecting or connecting cables.

• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing.

These types of disks are not played back correctly

unless the left, center, right and surround left and

right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.

• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1

is connected to the SR7001, multi channel PCM

playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio

disks.

• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support

HDMI 1.2 is connected to the receiver, DSD

playback is not possible even with Super Audio

CD.

(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)

• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output

is connected to the SR7001, a separate audio

cable (optical-digital, coaxial digital or analog) is

needed for the audio signals. In this case, select the

connected audio input as explained in “1-1 FUNC

INPUT SETUP”. (See page 25)

• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 62

kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are

not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.

• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the

HDMI signal may be affected by noise.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

OUT

COAX.

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OFF

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

INOUT

VCR1

ININ

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.

SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN

TER

FRONT

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

OUTPUT 1

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

HDMI OUTPUT HDMI INPUT

HDMI OUTPUT

SATELLITE TUNER

ENGLISH

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VCR1

DVD

(

)

VCR1

(

)

OUT

PUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

S-VIDEO

OUT

DVD

(

)

VCR1

(

)

MONI. OUT

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

COAX.

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2TV

OPT.

OUT

ININ

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

AUDIO

OUT

DIGITAL

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT IN

S-VIDEO

OUT IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

L R

L R L R LR

L LR R

S-VIDEO

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONI. OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

DIGITAL IN

DSS/VCR2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUTIN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

COAX.

OUT OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

VCR1

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

DVD

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

(

AUX2

)

RS-232

AUDIO

OUT

DIGITAL

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

L R

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS

Analog Audio

Video

S-Video

DVD player

VIDEO

PROJECTOR

Satellite Tuner

Digital Audio

(coaxial)

VCR

VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS

There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.

VIDEO jack

The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the

conventional composite video signal.

S-VIDEO jack

The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-VIDEO

signals enables high-quality color reproduction. If

your video component has an S-VIDEO output, we

recommend to use it. Connect the S-VIDEO output

jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input

jack on the SR7001.

Component jack

Make component video connections to a TV or

monitor with component inputs to produce higher

quality video images. Use a component video cable

or 3 video cords to connect the component video out

jacks on the SR7001 to the monitor.

Notes:

•

Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels

properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are the for L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the

video signals properly.

•

If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to

the S-VIDEO or component jack on the SR7001, it is

not necessary to connect the conventional video signal

to the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video

inputs, the SR7001 gives priority to the S-VIDEO

signal.

• Each type of video jack works independently.

Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and S-

VIDEO jacks or component are output to the

corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO

or component jacks, respectively.

•

he SR7001

has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function

to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing

the incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.

• You may need to setup the digital audio output

format of your DVD player, or other digital source

components. Refer to the instructions of the each

component connected to the digital input jacks.

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an

external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder

when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack

of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals

of the SR7001 can output the same video signal.

Moreover, the OUTPUT 2 terminal of the SR8001

can output video signals for multi room playback.

(See page 35)

Digital Audio

(optical)

ENGLISH

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

CD/CDR

OUT

MULTI OUT

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2

T 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

T 3

(

VCR1

)

(

DSS/VCR2

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

7.1CH

ULTI

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MODEL N

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

PRE

OUT

7.1CH

(

AUX2

)

FRONT SURR.

SURR.

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT SURR.

SURR.

BACK

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

RL RL RL

R L

LR LR

R L

RL RLRL

R L

ADVANCED CONNECTING

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE

The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio

source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel

player, DVD audio player or external decoder.

If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT

and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP

MAIN MENU. See page25.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER

The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external

power ampliﬁ ers.

Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding

external power ampliﬁ er.

Power

Amplifer

DVD Audio player

Super Audio CD

Multi channel player

Center

Front

Left

Front

Right

Surround

Left

Surround

Right

Subwoofer

Surround

Back Left

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VID

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

COAX.

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

INOUT

VCR1

ININ

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUTDIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OU

(

AUX2

)

OUT

RC-5

REMOTE

CONTROL

REMOTE

CONTROL

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

RC OUT

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS

DVD player

CD recorder

You can control other Marantz products through the

SR7001 with the remote control by connecting the

REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.

The signal transmitted from the remote control is

received by the remote sensor on the SR7001. Then

the signal is sent to the connected device through

this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote

control only at the SR7001. Also, if a Marantz power

ampliﬁ er (some models excluded) is connected to

one of these terminals, the power ampliﬁ er’s, power

switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.

Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the other

units, (not the SR7001) to “EXT.” (external) to use

this feature.

CD player

OPTION

Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices

are connected to RC-5 IN of the SR7001, be sure to

always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the

main unit by using the following procedure.

Hold down the MULTI button and the MENU

button on the front panel at the same time for

ﬁ ve seconds.

The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL

DISPLAY.

Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change

this to “IR=DISABLE”.

Press the ENTER button. Once this setting is

made, the infrared sensor on the main unit is

disabled.

Note:

• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external

infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected.

Otherwise, the main unit will be unable to receive

remote control commands.

To restore the original setting, perform steps 1

to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.

Surround

Back Right

ENGLISH

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

OUT

COAX.

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OFF

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

OPT.

OUT

INOUT

VCR1

ININ

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

VIDEO

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MULTI

OUT

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.

SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN

TER

FRONT

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

(

Ω

)

GND

ANTENNA

(

575ΩΩ

))

GNDGND AMAM

ANTANTENN

FM Antenna

FM External

Antenna

AM Loop

Antenna

AM External

Antenna

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA

Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection

line.

Bend the base part in the reverse direction.

Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part

into the slot at the base part.

CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS

Connecting the supplied FM antenna

The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only.

During use, extend the antenna and move it in various

directions until the clearest signal is received.

Fix it with push pins or similar implements in

the position that will cause the least amount of

distortion.

If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor

antenna may improve the quality.

Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna

The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use

only.

Set it in the direction and position it to where you

receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as

possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables,

and power cords.

If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor

antenna may improve the quality.

Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna

terminal.

Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal.

Release the lever.

Note:

• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the

AM antenna GND terminal.

CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

Notes:

• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon

signs, busy roads, etc.).

• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it

well away from power lines, transformers, etc.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,

grounding is necessary.

CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is

stretched horizontally above a window or outside.

Notes:

• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,

grounding is necessary.

Place the antenna on stable surface.

ENGLISH

XM RADIO OVERVIEW

SR7001 is the XM Ready

receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio

by connecting to the XM Connect-

and-Play

or Passport system (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.

Introducing XM Satellite Radio

There’s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM. XM Satellite Radio which includes:

• Over 170 Digital Channels

• The most commercial-free music in satellite radio

• Live concerts plus exclusive original programming

• The biggest names in news, talk, and entertainment

• The most sports play-by-play

• Major league Baseball. Every team. All season long.

Questions? Visit www.xmradio.com <http://www.xmradio.com/>

How to Subscribe

Listeners can subscribe by visiting XM on the Web at www.xmradio.com or by calling XM’s Listener Care at

(800) 967-2346. Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready. The Radio ID can be found by

selecting channel 0 on the radio.

(See the “CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID”)

A Warning Against Reverse Engineering

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated

in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system.

Furthermore, the AMBE

voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual

property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of

this or any other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile,

reverse engineer, or disassemble the object code, or in any other way convert the object code into human-

readable form. The software is licensed solely for use within this product.

XM $ 12.95 monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Connect-and-Play and Passport system

required to receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a

one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to

change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channle blocking is available

for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement

available at xmradio.com. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. [XM Ready,

CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY ANTENNA

• Plug the XM Connect-and-Play antenna or Passport system into XM terminal on the rear panel.

• Position the XM antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.

When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Connect-and-Play antenna or

Passport system.

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OFF

OUT

MULTI OUT

UDIO

OUT

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

PUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

7.1CH

MULTI

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

Note

• Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Connect-and-Play antenna connection have been completed.

ENGLISH

COMPONENT

VIDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

OUT

COAX.

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OUTIN

OUT

DSS/VCR2TV

OPT.

IN INOUT

VCR1

ININ

DVD SL

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

(

75Ω

)

GND AM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RC-5

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

VCR1

(

)

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.

SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN

TER

FRONT

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

OFF

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

OUT

VIDEO

MULTI RC

MULTI

OUT

MULTI OUT

AUDIO

L R LR

FRONTRC IN

R L

FRONT

RC OUT

VIDEO

ONON

OFFOFF

EAKERMULTI SPEAKER

KER C/SPEAKER C

AKERSUB SPEAKER

CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT

SPEAKER

IR RECEIVER

MULTIROOM

RIGHT

SPEAKER

MULTIROOM

LEFT

SPEAKER

MAIN AMP

(For multiroom)

MULTIROOM B

(Multi room speaker)

MONITOR

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

SURROUND

BACK

OFF

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.

SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS

FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS

FRONT

SURR.

CEN

TER

FRONT

DEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

SPEAKER

SYSTEMS

SURROUND

BACK

OFF

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

FRONT

ONON

OFFOFF

EAKERMULTI SPEAKER

KER C/SPEAKER C

AKERSUB SPEAKER

Note:

• You can use surround back speaker terminals as

MULTI SPK. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal

when you are not using surround back speakers.

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE

Bi-wire Connection

A bi-wire connection is possible with speakers that

have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).

This allows you to drive the treble and bass units

with separate channel amps, which enables better

sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the

ﬁ gure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the

rear panel to ON.

Notes:

• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the

receiver will trip and set the receiver to standby.

(The STANDBY indicator will ﬂ ash.) In such case,

recheck the connections between the speakers and

the receiver.

• Turn power to the receiver off before changing the

setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.

• If the speaker is ﬁ tted with a shorting bar, remove the

shorting bar.

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT

SPEAKER

ENGLISH

a RS232C

Connect an external control device or other device for

servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)

s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)

External devices can be controlled from the SR7001

by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V).

d EMITTER OUT (SR8001 Only)

Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR

RECEIVER IN terminals. External components can

be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER

OUT terminal.

f FLASHER IN

This receiver can be controlled by connecting a

control box or other control device to this receiver.

PONENT

IDEO

IN OUT

S-VIDEO

IN OUT

SLL

RSR

FLASHER

RECEIVER

OUT

SURROUND

BACK

OUT

LTAPE CD/CDR

OFF

OUTIN

MULTI OUT

OUT

S/VCR2

AUDIO

OUT

YYY

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

EMITTER

OUT

UNSWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

AC OUTLETS

120V 60Hz

SWITCHED

1.25A 150W MAX

OUT

PUT

OUT

PUT

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

HDMI

Ver1.2

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

DC OUT

PRE

OUT

RC-5 MULTI RC

7.1CH

MONITOR

OUT

/VCR2

(

)

MULTI

OUT

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

)

VCR1

(

)

(

)

MONI. OUT

(

AUX2

)

RS-232C

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER

MODEL NO. SR8001

AC IN

f d

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT

g IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 Only)

This receiver can be operated by remote control

without using the internal IR receiver, by connecting

an external IR receiver.

+12V

GND

Signal

An IR receiver is connected as shown above.

Caution:

• Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting

an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the

SR7001, therefore do not do this.

• 50 mA of current are supplied to the device connected

to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal.

• Connecting a device that requires more than 50 mA

of current to this receiver will damage this receiver.

Before using other devices, carefully check the

speciﬁ cations of those devices.

ENGLISH

SETUP

After all components are connected, initial setup

must be performed.

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM

The SR7001 incorporates an onscreen menu system,

which makes various operations possible by using

the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and OK/ENTER buttons on

the remote control unit or on the front panel.

Note:

•

To view the onscreen displays, make certain you

have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear

panel to the composite, S-Video, component video

or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page

15, 16)

Press the AMP button on the remote control

unit. (This step is not needed when operating

the setup menus from the SR7001.)

Press the MENU button on the remote control

or press the MENU button on the front panel.

The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system

is displayed.

There are 6 items in the MAIN MENU.

Select the desired sub-menu with the

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button. The display will change to the selected

sub-menu.

Notes:

• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set

it to UNLOCKED.

• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-6 on the MAIN

MENU to “LOCKED”.

(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the

MAIN MENU.

(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1

or 2 cursor buttons.

To exit from OSD menu system, press the

EXITbutton, or move the cursor to EXIT and

press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on the

unit or the OK button on the remote control unit.

When using the remote control unit, use the OK

button as if it were the ENTER button.

SR7001 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL

RC8001SR BUTTON CONTROL

2 31

5 64

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP·SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the OSD

menu system.

MENU button

Press this button to display

the OSD menu system.

UP button

RIGHT button

DOWN button

OK button

LEFT button

MultEQ

ENTER

THX

7.1CH INPUT

AUTO

MULTI T-MODE

MEMORY

DISPLAY

EXIT

BAND

MIC

SPEAKER

MULTI

UP button

RIGHT button

DOWN button

MENU button

Press this button to display the

OSD menu system.

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the

OSD menu system.

LEFT button

ENTER button

AMP (Ampliﬁ er) button

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

ENGLISH

Note:

• After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

MAIN MENU

1.INPUT SETUP

2.SPKR SETUP

3.SURR SETUP LOCKED

4.VIDEO SETUP

5.PREFERENCE UNLOCK

6.ACOUSTIC EQ

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

AUTO :DISABLE

OSD INFO :ENABLE

I/P CONVERT :DISABLE

HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1

COMPO OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL

BILINGUAL : MAIN+SUB

HDMI AUDIO: THROUGH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ

CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

CS PARAMETER

NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF

LFE LEVEL : -10dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 24)

MAIN MENU

SUB MENU

“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 27)

“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 33)

“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 35)

Note:

• The SR7001 does not have the “HDMI OUT”

and “COMPO OUT 2” sub-menus.

“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 36)

Note:

• The SR7001 does not have “MULTI ROOM

SETUP” A and B selection options.

“6. ACOUSTIC EQ” (P. 38)

ENGLISH

1 INPUT SETUP

This menu is for setting the matching the output of

connected audio devices and the input jacks of this

receiver.

•

FUNC INPUT SETUP :

“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 25)

•

7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :

“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 25)

•

FUNC RENAME :

“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 26)

Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with 3

4 cursor button, and press the

OK/ENTER button.

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired sub-menu with the

4 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER

button.

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:ANA - - - 1

CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2

AUX2:ANA - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1

DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2

VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3

DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

AUX1 :AUTO F - -

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV

RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV

WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr

stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$

%&’()

./:;<=>?

_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

VIDEO-IN : LAST

FRONT L : 0dB

CENTER : 0dB

FRONT R : 0dB

SURR.R : 0dB

SURR.B R : 0dB

SURR.B L : 0dB

SURR. L : 0dB

SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

☞

P. 25

☞

P. 25

☞

P. 26

ENGLISH

1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP

(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)

The 6 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned to

a desired source.

HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to

the preferred source.

Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are

to be assigned to which input source.

Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1

DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2

VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3

DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

AUX1 :AUTO F - -

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor

buttons, and assign a mode and input jack

(DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).

MODE

AUTO:

Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the

digital input signal condition.

If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog

signal present, the analog signal will be played.

"AUTO" is the initial setting of all input sources.

HDMI:

Select “HDMI”

, when only a HDMI signal will be

used

DIG:

Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be

used.

ANA:

Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital

input jacks are used.

DIG

6 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a

desired source.

Assign the number of a digital input jack to the

device.

HDMI

Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the

device.

Note:

• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and

HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to

THROUGH, audio is not output from the SR7001.

(See page 36)

COMP

Assign the number of a component video input

jack to the device.

V/S

Assign the number of a composite video and S-

video input jack to the device.

Notes:

• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when

assigning to input functions.

• The ✽ mark in AUX.1 indicates that other inputs

cannot be assigned.

Press the OK/ENTER button.

Select each mode setting and input terminal

with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1,

and 2 cursor buttons and then press the OK/

ENTER button to go to the next page.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:ANA - - - 1

CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2

AUX2:ANA - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4,

1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from

the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor

to “BACK” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽

mark.

1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP

This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1-

channel input sources.

Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so

that they are all heard by the listener at the same

level.

Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

VIDEO-IN : LAST

FRONT L : 0dB

CENTER : 0dB

FRONT R : 0dB

SURR.R : 0dB

SURR.B R : 0dB

SURR.B L : 0dB

SURR. L : 0dB

SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, select the

video input source to be played through the

MONITOR OUT jack.

The input source is switched by pressing the

2 cursor buttons as follows;

LAST ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR1 ↔ DSS ↔

AUX1 ↔ V-OFF ↔ LAST ↔...

Notes:

•

When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the

source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was

activated.

• When

“

V-OFF

” is selected,

no signal is emitted from

MONITOR OUT jack.

Select desired channel with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, adjust the

volume level of each channel.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and

2 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button to

go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and

+12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the

subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB

to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.

ENGLISH

1-3 FUNCTION RENAME

Input sources can be registered under any name.

This menu is for renaming input source.

This menu is for renaming function name. Names

can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces.

(Characters are selected from those appearing on

the display.) This name appears on the receiver's FL

display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the

OSD Setup menu.

Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.

INPUT SETUP menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV

RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV

WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr

stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$

%&’()

./:;<=>?

_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select “FUNCTION” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

Select an input source with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

Select “RENAME” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to

change with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

Move the cursor to the character list with the 4

cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A”

to begin with.)

Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selected letter.

Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.

BACK:

Deletes the character left of the cursor in the

“RENAME” area one character at a time.

DEFAULT:

Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the

name in the “FUNCTION” area.

SPACE:

Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “RENAME”

area.

Note:

• RENAME cannot be left blank.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and

2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

go to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.

ENGLISH

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP

After you have installed the SR7001 connected all

the components and determined the speaker layout,

it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker

Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for

your environment and speaker layout.

Before you perform the following settings, it is

important that you first determine the following

characteristics:

•

AUTO SETUP:

“2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”

(see page 28)

•

MANUAL SETUP:

“2-2 MANUAL SETUP”

(see page 31)

•

THX AUDIO SETUP:

“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP”

(see page 32)

Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• After you complete this the portion of the setup,

press the OK/ENTER button. The cursor will move

to “RETURN” and press the OK/ENTER button to

go to the Sub-menu.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:--

NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM

SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

1ST MIC POSITION!!

START

CHECK

EXIT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG

SPEAKER SIZE

DISTANCE

CHANNEL LEVEL

CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

SPEAKER SIZE

THX SPKR : NO

SUB W : YES

FRONT : SMALL

CENTER : SMALL

SURR. : SMALL

SURR.B : 2CH

SURR.B SIZE : SMALL

LPF/HPF : 80Hz

BASS MIX :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

SPEAKER DISTANCE

UNIT : ft

FRONT L : 10.0 ft

CENTER : 10.0 ft

FRONT R : 10.0 ft

SURR.R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B L : 10.0 ft

SURR.L : 10.0 ft

SUB W : 10.0 ft

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

THX AUDIO SETUP

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY

SURR.B SPKR

:TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

SPEAKER LEVEL

TEST MODE : MANUAL

FRONT L : 0.0dB

CENTER : 0.0dB

FRONT R : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.B R : 0.0dB

SURR.B L : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATE !!

☞

P. 28

☞

P. 31

☞

P. 32

ENGLISH

Note:

• The detection check measures the state of use of all

speakers whether actually used or not.

For example, if the center speaker is not used, the

test tone will require time to go from the L-channel

to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug

the microphone or operate the SR7001 during this

time.

When the detection check ends, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

1ST MIC POSITION!!

START

CHECK

EXIT

Here, to view the results of the detection check,

select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button. The results

will be displayed.

SPEAKER CONFIG

CHECK !! SPEAKER

FRONT : YES

CENTER : NON

FRONT R : YES

SURR.R : YES

SURR.B R : NON

SURR.B L : NON

SURR.L : YES

SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

If the check results indicate an error, take suitable

action with that item and remeasure. (For error

messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on

page 30.)

After confirming the check results, select

“RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and

press the OK/ENTER button to return to the

OSD menu.

At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto

Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)

The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of

the SR7001 measures sound characteristics of the

speaker system and room where the receiver is used

and automatically optimizes settings.

The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by the

SR7001 provides the best listening environment for

multiple listeners.

To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a

test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6

listening positions, using the supplied microphone.

The measurement results are analyzed using an

original algorithm and environmental settings are

made to improve the sound characteristics of the

listening area.

To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker

distance, etc.) without using the AUTO SETUP feature,

see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 31 of the manual.

HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP

During measurement, the OSD menu displays the

condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.

Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC

jack on the SR7001.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR7500

POWER ON/STANDBY PHONES

STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MT X 6.1

PCM

AAC

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIOS-VIDEODIGITAL VIDEO L R

DOWN

VOLUME

ENTER

INPUT SELECTOR

Set the microphone in the listening position.

Notes:

• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6

listening positions.

For the ﬁ rst measurement, set the microphone in the

main listening position.

• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at

ear height in the listening position.

• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and

microphone.

• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the

volume to the middle point and set the crossover

frequency to the highest.

• During measurement, step away from the microphone

and operate the SR7001 via the remote control unit

from a position that is out of the path of the speaker

sound.

• The test tone output from the speakers during

measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and

watch out for small children.

Either press the MultEQ™ button on the

front panel of the SR7001 or select “2. SPKR

SETUP” from the MAIN MENU, select “AUTO

SETUP” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and

press the OK/ENTER button to display the start

screen.

Select the number of channels for the surround

back speaker you are using.

For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select

“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use

speaker C or multi speaker, select “NON”. See

page 20, 37.)

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button to start

measurement.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM

SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

Detection Check

During the detection check, the following

OSD appears on the display and checks are

made to detect dark sound in the listening

room, whether there are speakers or not and

polarity.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:--

NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

Calibration Check

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

1ST MIC POSITION!!

START

CHECK

EXIT

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button to measure

the ﬁ rst point (main listening position).

During measurement, the following OSD

appears on the display. At this point, you can

cancel measurement by selecting “CANCEL”

with the 3/4 cursor buttons and pressing the

OK/ENTER button.

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

EXIT

When this measurement ends, the following

OSD appears on the display

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2ND MIC POSITION!!

START

CALCULATE

EXIT

ENGLISH

8. Move the microphone to the second listening

position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

measure the second point. At this point, you

can cancel second point measurement and

calculate measurement results by selecting

“CALCULATE” and pressing the OK/ENTER

button.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2ND MIC POSITION!!

START

CALCULATE

EXIT

Repeat steps 7 and 8 until measuring 6

points between the main listening position and

surrounding positions.

When all measurements end, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

CALCULATE

EXIT

Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button

to calculate measurement results. During

calculations, the following OSD appears on the

display.

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATE !!

EXIT

Note:

• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is

recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order

to obtain the best results.

• The time needed to complete calculations depends

on the number of connected speakers and measured

listening positions. The more speakers and listening

positions, the more time is needed.

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker size and

crossover frequency

SPEAKER SIZE

FRONT L : AUTO

CENTER : AUTO

FRONT R : AUTO

SURR.R : AUTO

SURR.B R : AUTO

SURR.B L : AUTO

SURR.L : AUTO

SUB W : AUTO

RETURN NEXT

CROSSOVER FREQ

FRONT : AUTO

CENTER : AUTO

SURR : AUTO

SURR.B : AUTO

RETURN

* AUTO is displayed to indicate that the speaker

size and crossover frequency results were

automatically measured.

11.

Storing Measurement Results in Memory

Once finished confirming the measurement

results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

display the CHECK RESULT screen.

CHANNEL LEVEL

FRONT L : 0.0dB

CENTER : -6.5dB

FRONT R : -1.5dB

SURR.R : +1.0dB

SURR.B R : +9.5dB

SURR.B L : +12.0dB

SURR.L : -2.5dB

SUB W : -12.5dB

RETURN NEXT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG

SPEAKER SIZE

DISTANCE

CHANNEL LEVEL

CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Place the cursor on “STORE” and press the

OK/ENTER button to store all parameters

including the equalizer parameters in memory.

If not wanting to store the calculation results in

memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press

the OK/ENTER button.

10.

Checking Measurement Results

When calculations for the measurement results

end, a screen appears for confirming the

calculation results.

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG

SPEAKER SIZE

DISTANCE

CHANNEL LEVEL

CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

enter them.

Note:

To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page

39.

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker detection

SPEAKER CONFIG

CHECK !! SPEAKER

FRONT : YES

CENTER : NON

FRONT R : YES

SURR.R : YES

SURR.B R : NON

SURR.B L : NON

SURR.L : YES

SUB W : YES

RETURN NEXT

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for the distance from

speakers to the listening position

DISTANCE

UNIT : ft

FRONT L : 30.00ft

CENTER : 19.33ft

FRONT R : 29.66ft

SURR.R : 21.50ft

SURR.B R : 12.33ft

SURR.B L : 11.66ft

SURR.L : 16.33ft

SUB W : 12.50ft

RETURN NEXT

* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to

[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons.

Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed,

the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m]

(meters).

Note:

Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all

measurement results and calculation results, therefore

operate the remote control unit with care.

When storing operations end, the following OSD

appears on the display.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

Note:

Do not turn the power to the SR7001 off while storing

parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the

SR7001’s memory and may damage the receiver.

ENGLISH

ERROR MESSAGES

Displayed Error Cause How to Remedy

MIC SET ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM

SURR BACK: 2CH

MIC SET ERROR!!

RETURN EXIT

• The microphone is not properly connected. • Connect the included microphone.

• Check the microphone connection.

NOISE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

NOISE ERROR !!

RETURN EXIT

• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.

• Volume from the speakers is low.

• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air

conditioners.

• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.

ANALYZE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

ANALYZE ERROR !!

RETURN NEXT EXIT

* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button. A detail screen like the

following appears on the display.

SPEAKER CONFIG

CHECK !! SPEAKER

FRONT L : YES REV

CENTER : NON

FRONT R : YES REV

SURR.R : NON ERR

SURR.B R : YES ERR

SURR.B L : YES ERR

SURR.L : NON ERR

SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.

• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.

In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.

• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is

backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)

• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but

the surround back speaker is connected

(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and

surround back speakers.)

An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are

connected as follows.

• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to

the surround back R-channel

(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-

channel.)

• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity

([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly

connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)

• Check speaker direction and layout

ENGLISH

2-2 MANUAL SETUP

Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU.

Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

SPEAKER SIZE

THX SPKR : NO

SUB W : YES

FRONT : SMALL

CENTER : SMALL

SURR. : SMALL

SURR.B : 2CH

SURR.B SIZE : SMALL

LPF/HPF : 80Hz

BASS MIX :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER

SIZE menu, use the guidelines below.

LARGE:

The complete frequency range for the channel you

are setting will be output from the speaker.

SMALL:

Frequencies of the channel you are setting that

are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from

the subwoofer.

If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front

speakers are set to “LARGE,” then the sound will

be output from both the left and right speakers.

Select each speaker with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

Set the size of each speaker with the 1

cursor buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and

2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

THX SPKR

If you are using a full THX speaker systems which

are approved by THX Ltd:

• The front, center and surround speaker size

should be “SMALL”.

• The subwoofer should be “YES”.

• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be

“80Hz”.

You need to set the number of surround back

speakers

and the surround back speaker size should

be “SMALL”.

SUB W

YES:

Select when a subwoofer is connected.

NO:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

FRONT

LARGE:

Select if the front speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the front speakers are small.

• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then

this setting is ﬁ xed at “LARGE”.

CENTER

NONE:

Select if no center speaker is connected.

LARGE:

Select if the center speaker is large.

SMALL:

Select if the center speaker is small.

SURR.

NONE:

Select if no surround left and right speakers are

connected.

LARGE:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are

large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are

small.

SURR. B

NONE:

Select if no surround back left and right speakers

are connected.

2CH:

Select if the surround back left and right speakers

are connected.

1CH:

Select if one surround back speaker is connected.

In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the

SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.

Notes:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then

this setting is ﬁ xed to “NONE.”

SURR. BACK SIZE

LARGE:

Select if the surround back speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround back speakers are small.

Note:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then

this setting is not available.

LPF/HPF

When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff

frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of

the crossover frequency levels according to the size

of the small speakers connected.

60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz →

160Hz → 180Hz

Note:

• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher

frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly

lower frequency.

BASS MIX

• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE”

is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set for the

subwoofer during stereo playback.

This setting has effect only during playback of

PCM or analog stereo sources.

• When “BOTH” is selected, the low frequencies will

be played through the main L&R speakers and the

subwoofer.

In this playback mode, the low frequency range

expands more uniformly throughout the room, but

depending on the size and shape of the room,

interference may result in a decrease of the actual

volume of the low frequency range.

• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play

through the main L&R only. This selection is

preferred by THX.

Note:

• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or

DTS will be played through the subwoofer.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the

3, 4, 1

and 2

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

SPEAKER DISTANCE

UNIT : ft

FRONT L : 10.0 ft

CENTER : 10.0 ft

FRONT R : 10.0 ft

SURR.R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B L : 10.0 ft

SURR.L : 10.0 ft

SUB W : 10.0 ft

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

Use this menu to specify the distance of each

speaker’s position from the listening position. The

delay time is automatically calculated according to

these distances.

Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly

used seating position in the room.

This is important for the timing of the acoustics to

create the proper sound space that the SR7001 and

today’s sound systems are able to produce.

Note:

• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”,

the speaker conﬁ guration sub-menu will not appear

here. (There are several useful books and special

DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper

home theater conﬁ guration. If you are unsure, have

your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you.

They are trained professionals familiar with even

the most sophisticated custom installations.

Marantz

recommends the www.cedia.org website for further

information.)

Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT

with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

Select each speaker with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

10.

Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1

2 cursor buttons.

FRONT L:

Set the distance from the front left speaker to your

normal listening position.

CENTER:

Set the distance from the center speaker to your

normal listening position.

FRONT R:

Set the distance from the front right speaker to

your normal listening position.

SURR. L:

Set the distance from the surround left speaker to

your normal listening position.

SURR. R:

Set the distance from the surround right speaker to

your normal listening position.

ENGLISH

SUB W:

Set the distance from the subwoofer to your

normal listening position.

SURR. B L:

Set the distance from the surround back left

speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. B R:

Set the distance from the surround back right

speaker to your normal listening position.

Notes:

• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet

(ft) as follows.

m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps

ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps

(The values appearing on the FL display are

approximate.)

• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the

speaker size menu will not appear.

• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears

if it is set, two surround back speakers in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for

one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE

menu.

11.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and

2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

S PEAKER LEVEL

TES T MODE : MANUAL

FRONT L : 0.0dB

CENTER : 0.0dB

FRONT R : 0.0dB

S URR.R : 0.0dB

S URR.B R : 0.0dB

S URR.B L : 0.0dB

S URR.L : 0.0dB

S UB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

Here you can set the volume for each speaker so

that they are all heard by the listener at the same

level. We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound

Pressure Level) meter at the listening position, at

arms length, and pointing straight up at the ceiling,

adjust the level of each speaker in turn unit it reads

75dB SPL when the meter is set to “C” weighting and

Slow responce.

Note:

• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1

Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source

Direct mode.

TEST MODE:

Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the

test tone with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled

through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →

Center → Right → Surround Right → Surround

Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround

Left → Subwoofer → Left, in 2 seconds increments

for each channel.

Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume

level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the

same level for all the speakers.

If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of

each speaker as listed below.

12.

Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the

4 cursor button. The SR7001 will emit a pink

noise from the front left speaker.

Remember the level of this noise and then

press the 4 cursor button.

(Note that this can be adjusted to any level

between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)

The SR7001 will now emit the pink noise from

the center speaker.

13.

Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

volume level of the noise from the center

speaker so that it is the same level as the front

left speaker.

14.

Press the 4 cursor button again. The SR7001

will now emit the pink noise from the front right

speaker.

15.

Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and

other speakers until all speakers are adjusted

to the same volume level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the

OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN”.

Press the OK/ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR

SETUP”.

Notes:

• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.

• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for

two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE

menu.

• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back

speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input

sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub

menu. (See page 33)

• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.

2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP

You can set the advanced Speaker Array.

Select “2. SPEAKER SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU.

Select “THX AUDIO SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

THX AUDIO SETUP

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY

SURR.B SPKR

:TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART

The best ASA effect is when the surround back

speakers are together and facing forward.

If the distance between the surround back speakers

is,

• Less than 12 in. (30 cm): TOGETHER

• Greater than 12 in. (30 cm), and less than 48 in.

(122 cm): CLOSE

• Greater than 48 in. (122 cm): APART

Speaker type and positioning

This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1

channel speaker systems used in ASA mode. During

system setup, select the distance between surround

back speakers.

SBL SBR

Surround B

Surround A

Surround-L Surround-R

Surround A

Di-polar Radiating Speaker

Direct Radiating Speaker

Front-L Center Front-R

Surround Back

Note:

• If you set SURR.B = 1CH or NONE in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array

will not be activated.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press OK/ENTER button to go to the 2.

SPKR SETUP menu.

ENGLISH

3 SURROUND SETUP

This menu is for setting surround effect parameters

for the various surround input signals so as to bring

out the live audio effect of your speaker system.

•

CHANNEL LEVEL:

“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL”

(see page 33)

•

x MUSIC PARAMETER:

“3-2 PLII x MUSIC PARAMETER”

(see page 34)

•

PARAMETER:

“3-3 CSII

PARAMETER”

(see page 34)

•

NEO:6 PARAMETER:

“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER”

(see page 34)

Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

CS PARAMETER

NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF

LFE LEVEL :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

RE-EQ:

Turns THX Cinema Re-EQ™ on and off.

Select the Cinema Re-EQ™ with the 1 or 2 cursor

button to activate it.

LFE LEVEL:

Select the output level of the LFE signal included

in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal.

Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1 or 2 cursor

button.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• After you complete this portion of the setup, press

the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to

“RETURN” and press the OK/ENTER button

again to go to sub-menu.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

CS PARAMETER

NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF

LFE LEVEL :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

CHANNEL LEVEL

SURR.MODE:

AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.B R : 0.0dB

SURR.B L : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF

DIMENSION : 0

CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0

SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

☞

P. 34

☞

P. 33

☞

P. 34

☞

P. 34

3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL

Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button.

Set the SURR. MODE with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

CHANNEL LEVEL

SURR.MODE:

AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.BACK L : 0.0dB

SURR.BACK R : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

Select the desired menu item with the 3

cursor buttons, set the desired level with the 1

2 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER

button.

SURROUND MODE:

The surround mode can be independently set for

3 modes.

1. Multi Ch STEREO

2. CSII

3. Others

CHANNEL LEVEL

CENTER LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the center speaker between

–12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will

not appear.

SURR L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround speaker

between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will

not appear.

SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker

between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back

speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this

setting will not appear.

ENGLISH

SUB W LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker

between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will

not appear.

Note:

• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or

CSII will affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2

MANUAL SETUP”.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the

3. SURR SETUP menu.

3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER

The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1

channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also

supports 5.1 channel input.)

This mode expands the sound image from the center

channel.

Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and

press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and

1.0 in 0.1 level

increments

with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Notes:

• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music

mode.

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is

disabled.

3-2 PL

x (PRO LOGIC

x) MUSIC PARAMETER

Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and

enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources

such as CDs.

In this mode, the SR7001 includes three controls to

ﬁ ne-tune the sound ﬁ eld as follows.

Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

Select “PL

x MUSIC PARAMETER” with the

4 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF

DIMENSION : 0

CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PARAMETER:

Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three

parameters as listed below.

PANORAMA:

Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” or “OFF” with

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right

speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION:

Set the DIMENSION level between –3 and +3

level in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons.

Adjust the sound ﬁ eld either towards the front or

towards the rear.

This can be useful to help achieve a more

suitable balance from all the speakers with certain

recordings.

CENTER WIDTH:

Set the CENTER WIDTH level between 0 and 7 in

1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Center width allows you to gradually spread the

center channel sound into the front left and right

speakers.

At its widest setting, all the sound from the center

is mixed into the left and right speakers.

This control may help achieve a more spacious

sound or a better blend for the front image.

If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting

cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3-3 CS

PARAMETER

Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and

press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “CS

PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0

SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

TRUBASS:

Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level

increments with the

1 or 2

cursor buttons.

TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave

below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers

adding exciting, deeper bass effects.

SRS DIALOG:

Set the SRS DIALOG level between

0 and 6

in 1-

increments

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

This can be popped out of the surround audio

effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what

the actors say.

If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting

cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• This parameter can only be set in the CSII mode.

ENGLISH

4 VIDEO SETUP

Video settings are made as follows.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

AUTO :DISABLE

OSD INFO :ENABLE

I/P CONVERT :ENABLE

HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1

COMPO OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

•

VIDEO CONVERT

“4-1 VIDEO CONVERT”

•

TV-AUTO

Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable

or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to

page 46)

•

OSD INFO

Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE”

or “DISABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

If you select “ENABLE”, the SR7001 will display

the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input

select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire

this information, select “DISABLE”.

Note:

• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output

of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD

information is output if the Video Convert function

is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to

Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.

For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 41.

•

IP CONVERT

Select the IP CONVERT ON/OFF function to

enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

(refer to page 41)

•

HDMI OUT

(This feature is not available on the SR7001.)

This setting is for selecting which output terminal,

HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select

the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor

buttons.

•

COMPONENT OUT

(This feature is not available on the SR7001.)

This setting is for selecting whether to output

the images for the main room or the images for

the multi room system to the COMPONENT

MONITOR OUT 2 terminal. Select the output

destination between MAIN and MULTI with the 1 /

2 cursor buttons.

Note:

• When MULTI 1 is selected, video signals converted

from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not

output.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/

ENTER

button.

4-1 VIDEO CONVERT

The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals for

monitor output.

This section explains how to set up conversion for

each type of video input.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

VIDEO CONVERT

TV : ANA&HDMI

DVD : ANA&HDMI

VCR1 : ANA&HDMI

DSS : ANA&HDMI

AUX1 : ANA&HDMI

TAPE : ANA&HDMI

CD/R : ANA&HDMI

AUX2 : ANA&HDMI

RETURN BACK EXIT

Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and set the video conversion mode

with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons

ANA&HDMI:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts

analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,

Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts

from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down-

convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog

video signals.)

ANA ONLY:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts

analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,

Component Video). It does not up-convert to

HDMI.

OFF:

This mode turns off all conversion features.

Note:

• For details on video convert feature, see page 41.

ENGLISH

5 PREFERENCE

•

MULTI ROOM SETUP :

“5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP”

(see page 37)

•

DC TRIGGER SETUP :

“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP”

(see page 37)

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL

BILINGUAL : MAIN

HDMI AUDIO: ENABLEH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

STAND BY:

When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce

the power consumption when the unit is in the

Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected,

“TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the

unit is in the Standby mode.

BILINGUAL:

In the Bilingual mode, Dolby Digital and DTS

output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select

“BILINGUAL” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then

select MAIN ↔ SUB ↔ MAIN+SUB with the 1 or

2 cursor buttons.

HDMI AUDIO:

This setting determines whether to play back audio

input to the HDMI jacks through the SR7001 or

output it through the receiver to a TV or projector.

ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks

can be played back by this receiver.

In such case, audio signals are not

output to the TV or projector.

THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is

not output from the speaker terminals

of the SR7001. Audio data is output

directly to the TV or projector. This

setting is used to listen to audio on a

multi channel TV, etc.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/

ENTER

button.

(The SR7001 is not equipped

with the MULTI ROOM SETUP

B feature)

DC TRIGGER SETUP

DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE :

DVD : CD/R :

VCR1 : AUX2 :

DSS : TUNER :

AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP

DC TRIG-2:DISABLE

TV : TAPE :

DVD : CD/R :

VCR1 : AUX2 :

DSS : TUNER :

AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

MULTI ROOM SETUP B

AUDIO :DVD

SLEEP :OFF

MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK:

VOL :VARI VOL :

LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

MULTI ROOM SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :DVD

SLEEP :OFF

MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK:

VOL :VARI VOL :

LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL

BILINGUAL : MAIN

HDMI AUDIO: ENABLEH

RETURN NEXT EXIT

ENGLISH

5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP

The SR8001 has source selectors, sleep timers and

multispeaker output remote control units (Room

A only) for the two other rooms in the multi room

system. (The SR7001 has only one other room in the

multi-room system.)

These features can be set from this menu.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and

press the OK/ENTER button.

Select “MULTI ROOM SETUP” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons and select either “Room A” or

“Room B” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

setting.

The following explanation shows how to operate

MULTI ROOM A of the multi-room system.

The MULTI ROOM B setting does not have the

VIDEO FUNCTION.

(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting)

MULTI ROOM SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :DVD

SLEEP :OFF

MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK:

VOL :VARI VOL :

LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

Select the desired item with the 3

4 cursor

button.

VIDEO:

Select the video source of the multiroom output

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

AUDIO:

Select the audio source of the multiroom output

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SLEEP:

The sleep mode is available when the multiroom is

active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The

sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes

in 10 minute increments.

MONO/ST:

This mode switches audio output to the multi room

system between MONAURAL and STEREO,

using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

MULTI (MULTI ROOM):

Switch the multiroom output “ON” or “OFF” with

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

MSPK (MULTI SPEAKER):

Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

VOL (VOLUME SETUP):

Select whether the multiroom or multi speaker

output level is variable or ﬁ xed with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):

Adjust the multiroom output level with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons. The volume can be set between

-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

Note:

• This setting can be changed when the SURR B is

set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and

“SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear

panel. When this setting is unavailable, “✽✽✽” is

displayed.

• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the multiroom

output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B

room.

• MSPK cannot be on for both Room A and Room B at

the same time. After you complete this portion of the

setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP

This unit has 2 DC trigger control jacks, which can

be used to link with input functions for the main room

or multiroom.

Each trigger can be setup separately.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2” with the

3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

DC TRIGGER SETUP

DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE :

DVD : CD/R :

VCR1 : AUX2 :

DSS : TUNER :

AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

You can select “MAIN ROOM”, “MULTI

ROOM A”, “MULTI ROOM B”, “REMOTE”

“DISABLE” with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting)

Note:

• REMOTE is available for the external control. The

RC8001SR cannot operate the function.

Select desired input source with the 3

cursor buttons.

Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3

4 cursor button and press the OK/ENTER

button.

Note:

• When an input source that is on in the set room is

selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER

output terminal.

ENGLISH

6 ACOUSTIC EQ

This display is for setting up the equalizer and

changing the Equalizer mode.

•

PRESET G. EQ ADJ :

“6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ”

(see page 39)

•

CHECK AUTO 1 & 2 :

“6-2 CHECK AUTO”

(see page 39)

EQ MODE:

There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from:

PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually

adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and

FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the

measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature

(see page 28).

AUDYSSEY:

This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics

of all speakers so as to create the best listening

environment for the sound characteristics of the

listening room.

FRONT:

This mode matches the characteristics of each

speaker to those of the front speakers.

FLAT:

This mode ﬂ attens the frequency characteristics of

all speakers. It is suited for playback of multichannel

music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.

PRESET:

This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that

was set in PRESET G.EQ ADJ to adjust the

characteristics of each speaker (see page 39).

OFF:

The graphic equalizer is not used.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ

CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,

“PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/

ENTER

button.

Note:

• “AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT” and “FLAT” can be

selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.

• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto

Setup is manually turned on, the “AUDYSSEY”,

“FRONT” and “FLAT” modes cannot be selected.

• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode,

Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual

mode is set.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ

CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PRESET ADJUST

RESET:ALLCH 63-15.0

CH :SR 125 -2.5

250 -5.0

500 +9.0

1k +3.5

2k -5.5

4k -7.0

8k-18.5

16k-20.0

RETURN EXIT

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16kHz

CHECK AUTO

MD:AUDYSSEY 63-15.0

CH:SR 125 -2.5

250 -5.0

500 +9.0

1k +3.5

2k -5.5

4k -7.0

8k-18.5

16k-20.0

RETURN EXIT

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16kHz

ENGLISH

6-2 CHECK AUTO

These menus are for confirming the results of

AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement

(AUDYSSEY, FRONT, FLAT).

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

Select “CHECK AUTO” with the

cursor

buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CHECK AUTO

MD:AUDYSSEY 63 0.0

CH:FL 125 0.0

250 0.0

500 0.0

1k 0.0

2k 0.0

4k 0.0

8k 0.0

16k 0.0

RETURN EXIT

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16kHz

0dB

Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons

followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”,

“FRONT”, “FLAT”).

CH:

Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons.

Notes:

• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the

Preset G. EQ modes.

• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO

2 menu.

Once ﬁ nished checking, select “RETURN” with

the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC

EQ” menu.

6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ

These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic

equalizer for each of the 7 channels.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3

cursor buttons.

Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16kHz

PRES ET ADJUS T

RES ET:CH 63 0.0

CH :FL 125 0.0

250 0.0

500 0.0

1k 0.0

2k 0.0

4k 0.0

8k 0.0

16k 0.0

RETURN EXIT

0dB

RESET:

Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the

channel(s) to be reset to either the currently

displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”),

and press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

setting.

“ALL” : Resets all channels.

“CH” : Resets only the currently displayed

channel.

CH:

Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”,

“SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with

the 4 cursor button.

Frequency:

Select the target frequency on the graph with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to enter the selection. Adjust the level with

the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be

adjusted to any level between –20 and +9 dB in

0.5 dB increments.)

Move to the next frequency with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons, and adjust the level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the

OK/ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor

to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button.

ENGLISH

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

READY

MultEQ A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

AK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

PCM

AAC

2 31

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

VOL

Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using

the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or

VOLUME 3 / 4 buttons on the remote.

To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob

clockwise or press VOLUME 3 button on the remote,

to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or

press VOLUME 4 button on the remote.

Notes:

• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞

to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

•

However, when the channel level is set as described on

page 33, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB

or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.

(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range

is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)

NIGHT MODE

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

(Using the remote control unit)

adjust the tone

, press the AMP button and press

the > button PAGE3 is displayed.

Press the

NIGHT (D1)

button to turn on the Night

mode. Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses

the dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.

This softens loud passages such as sudden

explosions, to help prevent disturbing others late at

night.

To turn off the Night mode, Press the NIGHT

(D1) button again.

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)

CONTROL

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

During a listening session you may wish to adjust the

Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes

or room acoustics.

(Using the remote control unit)

adjust the tone

, press the AMP button and press

the > button PAGE3 is displayed.

To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ (D2) or

BASS– (D3).

To adjust the treble effect, TREB+ (D4) or TREB–

(D5).

Notes:

• The tone control function is unavailable for the

Source Direct, Pure Direct, Dolby Headphone,

Dolby Virtual Speaker THX mode, and 192kHz

PCM.

• The tone control function is not available when

PRESET G.EQ is being used.

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of

Dolby Digital.

When playing back software which has been

encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a

brief message on the FL display which will read "Dial

Norm X dB" (X being a numeric value).

Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the

source material has been recorded at a higher or

lower level than usual. For example, if you see the

following message: "Dial Norm + 4 dB" on the FL

display, to keep the overall output level constant just

turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words,

the source material that you are listening to has been

recorded 4 dB louder than usual.

If you do not see a message on the FL display, then

no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE

Example: AUTO SURROUND

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEA

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

1CH

ATT

SPK

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

VOL

USE

PAGE

123

(Using the SR7001)

To select the Auto surround mode during playback,

press the AUTO button on the front panel.

(Using the remote control unit)

To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP

button and press the > button until PAGE1 is

displayed. Press the AUTO (D1) button.

• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on

page 42.

• To add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode,

press either the THX button on the SR7001 or the

THX button on the remote control unit.

• To select a speciﬁ c surround mode, Press the

individual surround mode button on page 1.2 on

the remote control unit.

BASIC OPERATION

(PLAY BACK)

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to any input media, you must

ﬁ rst select the input source on the SR7001.

Example : DVD

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

DVD

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPE

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNE

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob

on the front panel or press the DVD button on the

remote two times in a row. After you have selected

DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and play the

DVD.

• As the input source is changed, the new input

name will appear momentarily an OSD information

on the video display. The input name will also

appear in the display, on the front-panel.

• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see

page 26) , the renamed name appears on the

display.

• As the input is changed, the SR7001 will

automatically switch to the digital input, surround

mode, attenuation, and night mode status which

were entered during the conﬁ guration process for

that source.

• When an audio source is selected, the last video

input used remains routed to the VCR1 & DSS/

VCR2 Outputs and Monitor Output. This permits

simultaneous viewing and listening to different

sources.

• When a video source is selected, the selected

video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT

terminal.

ENGLISH

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND

2 31

5 64

8 97

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

MUTE

To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as

when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE

button on the remote.

This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the

head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording

or dubbing that may be in progress.

When the system is muted, the display will show

“MUTE” .

Press the MUTE button again to return to normal

operation.

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

To program the SR7001 for automatic standby, press

the SLEEP button on the remote.

Each press of the button will increase the time before

shut down in the following sequence.

OFF 10 20 30 40

90 80 70 60 50

The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the

display on the front panel, and it will count down until

the time has elapsed.

When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the

unit will automatically turn off.

Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will

illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed.

To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP

button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the

SLEEP indicator will disappear.

VIDEO CONVERT

ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION

The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals

for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of

the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT

VIDEO) between the playback device and the

SR7001, listening and viewing are possible with a

single higher grade cable between the MONITOR

OUT terminal of the SR7001 and the monitor.

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO

SIGNALS TO HDMI

The up-conversion feature of the SR7001 can output

the input analog video signals (for component video

signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576P, 1080i and 720p

resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite)

of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR

terminal.

Notes:

• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001. If

connecting a playback device such as a DVD

player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 to a TV

monitor.

• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.

• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast

forward and reverse play on video component.

•

If, while attempting to use the video convert feature,

the SR7001 cannot synchronize with the display

device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or

noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of

these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility;

there is nothing wrong with the SR7001.

If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the

“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next,

connect the video input signal to the display component

via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and

the S-video input signal to the display component via

the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.

• The video convert feature constantly monitors

input video signals and determines whether to

convert the input signals or not. However, some

input video signals cannot be detected correctly.

If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the

“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.

•

For optimal video performance, THX recommends

setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”.

CONNECTION EXAMPLE

• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

or HDMI

Notes:

• If the resolution of the component video signal input

from the playback device is other than 480i/576i,

480p/576P, 1080i or 720p, images are not output

from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the

SR8001.

• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input

from the playback device is other than 480i/576i,

images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR

OUT terminal of the SR7001.

• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or S-

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback

device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001.

• If the resolution of the component video signal input

from the playback device is other than 480i/576i,

it is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001.

• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

component

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback

device is not output from the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001.

Notes of OSD menu system:

• The setup menu can be displayed through all

video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”,

“SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).

• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and

S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.

OSD information is also output when the video

conversion feature is on and the video signal input

to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the SR7001

is converted and output from the COMPONENT

VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.

I/P CONVERT

The video circuit of the SR7001 is equipped with an

I/P conversion feature.

When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video

signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO)

input from a playback device can be converted

to 480p/576p and progressively output to the

COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT

terminals of the SR7001.

(For setting instructions, see page 35)

ENGLISH

Note:

• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded

software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the

THX Surround EX mode.

THX SELECT2 CINEMA

THX SELECT2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using

all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie

watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing

blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back

speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and

directional surround sound.

This mode permits the playback of a non Surround

EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system.

DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby

Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be

automatically detected, if the appropriate ﬂ ag has

been encoded.

Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks

are missing the digital ﬂ ag that allows automatic

switching.

If you know that the movie that you are watching is

encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the

THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX

SELECT2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to

provide optimum replay.

THX MUSIC

For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music

mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA

processing is applied to the surround channels of all

5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby

Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage.

This mode is to be used with multichannel music

sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital

5.1 music.

Notes:

• These modes are only available when you have

setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround

back speakers).

• These modes are only available when the input

signal has surround left and surround right contents.

THX GAMES

For the replay of stereo and multichannel game

audio the THX Games mode should be selected.

In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to

the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded

game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and

Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio

surround information, providing a full 360-degree

playback environment. THX Games mode is unique

as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all

points of the surround ﬁ eld.

2 MODE

(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic

x MOVIE, Pro Logic

MUSIC, Pro Logic

x GAME)

This mode is used with source materials encoded in

Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.

DOLBY DIGITAL

This mode is enabled when playing source materials

encoded in Dolby Digital.

Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby

Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left,

center, right, surround left and surround right) and a

Low Frequency Effect channel.

Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this

mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:

Pro Logic

x MOVIE

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround

sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie

soundtracks.

Pro Logic

x MUSIC

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround

sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or

digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.

Pro Logic

x GAME

This mode

restores the impact low-frequency

surround effects by routing them to the system’s

subwoofer.

5.1ch + Pro Logic

x Movie

This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from

5.1 channel sources

movie soundtracks

5.1ch + Pro Logic

x Music

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound

from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.

Notes:

• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II

mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from

SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 31)

• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input

signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or

PCM format.

• PCM audio signals can be subjected to Pro Logic IIx

processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

SURROUND MODE

SURROUND

The SR7001/SR8001 is equipped with many

surround modes. These are provided to reproduce

a variety of surround sound effects, according to the

content of the source to be played.

The available surround modes may be restricted

depending on the input signal and speaker setup.

SOURCE DIRECT

In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit

Acoustic EQ. and bass management conﬁ guration

are bypassed for full-range frequency response and

the purist audio reproduction.

Notes:

• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center =

LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer

= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and

additional processing are deactivated.

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD

players, performing operations such as skip or stop

may momentarily interrupt the output.

PURE DIRECT

The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of

noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode,

by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO,

S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and

turning the FL display off.

AUTO

When this mode is selected, the SR7001/SR8001

determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby

Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, DTS, DTS-ES,

DTS 96/24 or PCM audio.

Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel

sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or

DTS-ES auto trigger ﬂ ag in the digital signal.

When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the

number of channels for which the corresponding

signal is encoded will be played.

Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with

Dolby surround status automatically subjects that

signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play.

PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this

mode.

Notes:

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD

players, performing operations such as skip or stop

may momentarily interrupt the output.

• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed

to AUTO mode automatically. See page 44 to

conﬁ rm the available decoding modes.

THX CINEMA

THX Cinema mode applies additional processing

to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multi-

channel, surround sources. The THX processing

was developed by Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. to recreate the

sound of top-quality theater.

Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc,

tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround

EX mode is not available.

THX SURROUND EX

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra channel which has

been added during the mixing of the program.

This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds

behind the listener in addition to the currently

available front left, front center, front right, surround

right, surround left and subwoofer channels.

This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and

brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound

localization than ever before.

THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel

source whenever THX is active.

THX Surround EX is not available in system without

surround back speaker(s).

ENGLISH

EX/ES

This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby

Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material

such as DVD.

This mode cannot be used when an analog input has

been selected.

Dolby Digital EX

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra channel which has

been added during the mixing of the program.

This channel, called surround back, places sounds

behind the listener in addition to the currently

available front left, front center, front right, surround

right, surround left and subwoofer channels.

This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and

brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound

localization than ever before.

Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do

not have without surround back speaker(s).

DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)

DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to

the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic

positioning, and makes acoustic image movement

more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction.

The SR7001/SR8001 incorporates a DTS-ES-

decoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discrete-

encoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program

sources from DVD, etc.

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete

recording of all channels, including the surround back

channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction.

DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have

surround back speakers.

dts

dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials

such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2

channel sources.

dts

This mode is enabled when playing source materials

encoded in dts multichannel.

Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts

sources provides five main audio channels (left,

center, right, surround left and surround right) and a

Low Frequency Effects channel.

dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode.

The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog

input has been selected.

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel

signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology.

The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties

in the frequency characteristics of the channels as

well as in channel separation.

According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6

uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for

movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized

for music playback.

Notes:

•

The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input

signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD

or PCM format.

• PCM audio signals can be subjected to Neo:6

processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

MULTI CH. ST

This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more

natural soundstage from two channel source material.

This is done by feeding the left channel signal to

both the left front and left surround speakers and the

right channel signal to both the right front and right

surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel

reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.

CIRCLE SURROUND

(CS

-CINEMA, CS

-MUSIC, CS

-MONO)

Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel

surround sound playback of non-encoded and

multichannel encoded material.

Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to

6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire

collection of music and ﬁ lm, including broadcast,

videotape and stereo recorded music.

Depending on source material, you can select CSII-

Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono

mode.

Notes:

• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input

signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD

or PCM format.

• PCM audio signals can be subjected to CS II

processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary

technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual

surround sound ﬁ eld using only two speakers for the

front channels, allowing the user to experience sound

as if surround speakers were actually being used.

STEREO

This mode bypasses all surround processing.

In stereo program sources, the left and right channels

play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is

input.

With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels

are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM

source material can be played back in stereo mode.

CAUTION

Note for DTS

•

To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD

player needs to support DTS digital output. You

may not be able to play some DTS source signals

from certain CD players and LD players even if

you connect the player to the SR7001/SR8001

digitally. This is because the digital signal has been

processed (such as the output level, sampling

frequency or frequency response), and the SR7001/

SR8001 cannot recognize the signal as DTS data.

• Depending on the player used, DTS play may

produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.

• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are

playing in another surround mode, you cannot

switch to digital input or from digital input to analog

input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU

or by pressing the A/D button.

• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a

multiroom.

•

The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT,

TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio

signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that

support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the

DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.

Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX

•

When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded

software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the

EX/ES mode.

• Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded

software does not contain the identiﬁ cation signal.

In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.

Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio

•

The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be

used when playing PCM signals with a sampling

frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/

Audio discs).

•

Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For

details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

•

Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When using

such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the

DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation

manual.

Note for HDCD

•

HDCD is effective only through digital input.

•

You may not be able to play some HDCD source

signals from certain CD players if you connect

the player to the SR7001/SR8001 digitally. This

is because the digital signal has been processed

(such as the output level, sampling frequency or

frequency response) and the SR7001/SR8001

cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.

ENGLISH

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

SBL

SBR

SubW

Signal format indicators Channel status

AUTO

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0

---

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x movie

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Stereo)

---

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo)

---

PCM L, R

PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz)

---

PCM L, R

HDCD HDCD

---

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Stereo

---

ANALOG -

7.1ch input Multi Ch

OOOOO

ANALOG -

SOURCE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0

---

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x movie

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch)

OOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (2ch)

---

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo)

----PCM L, R

PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz)

----PCM L, R

HDCD HDCD

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Stereo

- - - - ANALOG -

7.1ch input Multi Ch

OOOOO

ANALOG -

EX/ES

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX

OOOOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX

OOOOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DOLBY

(PLII x movie)

(PLII x music)

(PLII x game)

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLII x

OOOOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + PLII x

OOOOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

ANALOG -

DTS

(Neo:6 Cinema)

(Neo:6 Music)

DTS-ES DTS 5.1

OOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6

OOOOO

SA-CD L, R

PCM(Audio) Neo:6

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Neo:6

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Neo:6

OOOOO

ANALOG -

CSII Cinema

CSII Music

CSII Mono

Dolby D (2ch) CSII

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) CSII

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

SA-CD (2ch) CSII

OOOOO

SA-CD L, R

PCM(Audio) CSII

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD CSII

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog CSII

OOOOO

ANALOG -

STEREO

Dolby Surr.EX Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES Stereo

---

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 Stereo

---

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Stereo

---

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Stereo

---

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo

---

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Stereo

---

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Stereo

---

PCM L, R

PCM 96kHz Stereo

---

PCM L, R

HDCD Stereo

---

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Stereo

---

ANALOG -

The relationship between the selected surround

mode and the input signal

The surround mode is selected with the surround

mode selector on the SR7001 or the remote control

unit. However, the sound you hear is subject to the

relationship between the selected surround mode

and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:

ENGLISH

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

SBL

SBR

SubW

Signal format indicators Channel status

Dolby Virtual

Speaker

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Virtual Speaker

----

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----PCM L, R

HDCD Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Dolby Virtual Speaker

----ANALOG -

Multi Ch.

Stereo

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel Stereo

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel Stereo

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel Stereo

OOOOO

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Multi Channel Stereo

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Multi Channel Stereo

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Multi Channel Stereo

OOOOO

ANALOG -

Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P

----

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

----

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P

----

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P

----

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES Dolby H.P

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P

- - - - M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

- - - - SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Dolby H.P

----SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Dolby H.P

----PCM L, R

HDCD Dolby H.P

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Dolby H.P

----ANALOG -

THX

(THX Games)

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1

OOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1

OOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

ANALOG -

THX Select2

(THX EX)

(THX Music)

(THX Games)

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX

L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND

L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

M-PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

SA-CD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

SA-CD L, R

PCM (Audio) Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Pro Logic II x movie + THX

OOOOO

ANALOG -

Notes:

• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal

with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.

• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker,

center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has

no surround data.

Abbreviations

L/R : Front speakers

C : Center speaker

SL/SR : Surround speakers

SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers

SubW : Subwoofer

ENGLISH

OTHER FUNCTION

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION

This function allows the component connected to the

TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to

the SR7001.

AUTO POWER ON

Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Refer

to page 35: PREFERENCE)

Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-

VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the

VIDEO input.

Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the

SR7001.

Turn ON the TV TUNER and tune in a receivable

station.

When the station is received, the SR7001 turns

ON and TV is selected automatically.

AUTO POWER OFF

In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF

or select a channel that does not contain any

broadcast.

The power to the SR7001 switches to STANDBY

after approx. 5 minutes.

Notes:

• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if the SR7001 is

set to a source other than TV.

The function reactivates when TV is selected again.

• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO

FUNCTION to turn ON.

• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO

ON/OFF” function.

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

ATT

If the selected analog audio input signal is greater

than the capable level of internal processing, the

“PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If

this happens, you should press the ATT button on

the remote.

“ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function

is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by

about half. Attenuation will not work with the output

signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and

DSS/VCR2-OUT.

This function is memorized for each individual input

source.

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s

output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that

the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono

plug. (Note that the speakers will automatically be

turned off when the headphone jack is in use.)

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SP

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.

Note:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as

soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE

This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual

sounds heard from the speakers.

When headphones are used, the MENU button

automatically switches to the Dolby headphone

mode.

The OSD that appears when the MENU button is

pressed is shown below.

HEAD PHONE

DOLBY HP MODE : DH

SURROUND : PL

CINEMA

L LEVEL : +10dB

R LEVEL : 0dB

DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected

with the left and right cursor buttons.

BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS

BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode

and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.

DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing

system that delivers a sound similar to

room speakers.

It makes it possible to experience

the volume and space of a 5-channel

surround system using ordinary stereo

headphones.

When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby

surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is

displayed as the mode indication.

The surround mode can be selected when the

modes in DH is selected.

L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.

Notes:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as

soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

• TONE cannot be set when the mode in DH is

selected.

• The Dolby Headphone function will not work when

32 or 96 kHz PCM digital signals are input.

VIDEO ON/OFF

When no video signal is connected to the SR7001

or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV,

the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by

selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting.

To select video off, press the AMP button and press

the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the

V-OFF button.

NES

ND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

ENGLISH

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE

In normal operation, the audio or video source

selected for listening through the SR7001 is sent to

the record outputs.

This means that any program you are watching

or listening to may be recorded simply by placing

machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT,

CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in

the record mode.

To record the input source signal you are currently

watching or listening to

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAK

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TAPE

DSS

AUX2

AUX1

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

Select the input source to record by turning the

INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the

front panel or simply press the input selector

buttons on the remote.

The input source is now selected and you may

watch or listen to it as desired.

The currently selected input source signal

is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT,

VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for

recording.

Start recording to the recording component as

desired.

Recording the video from one source and

the audio from another

You can add the sound from one source to the

video of another source to make your own video

recordings.

Below is an example of recording the sound from

a compact disc player connected to CD IN and the

video from a video camera connected to VCR1 to

video cassette recorder connected to the DSS/VCR2

OUT jack.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AUX1

Switch the video output source to VCR1 by

simply pressing the input selector buttons on

the remote.

Switch the audio input source to CD by simply

pressing the input selector buttons on the

remote.

Now “CD” has been selected as the audio input

source and “VCR1” as the video input source.

Notes:

• If you change the input source during recording, you

will record the signals from the newly selected input

source.

• You cannot record the surround effects.

• Digital input signals are only output to the digital

outputs. There is no conversion from digital to

analog .

When connecting CD players and other digital

components, do not connect only the digital

terminals, but the analog ones as well.

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR

DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you

can temporarily select the audio input mode for each

input source as following procedures.

Press the AMP button and press the > button until

PAGE4 is displayed. Press the A/D (D3) button.

When this button is pressed, the input mode is

switched in the following sequence.

Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto

Auto mode:

The types of signals being input to the digital and

analog input jacks for the selected input source are

detected automatically.

If no digital signal is being input, the analog input

jacks are selected automatically.

HDMI mode:

HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI

input has been assigned as an input source.

When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the

SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI

mode cannot be selected.

Digital mode:

The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input

terminal.

Analog mode:

The analog input jacks are selected.

This selection is temporary and will not be stored in

memory.

To store changes to the input mode, select “1. INPUT

SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 25)

DISPLAY MODE

PHONES

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI T-MODE

MEMORY

DISPLAY

EXIT

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

DISP

You can select the display mode for the front display

of the SR7001.

To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the

remote control or the front panel.

When this button is pressed, the display mode is

switched in the following sequence.

Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF

→ Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input Mode

Normal Mode:

Displays the selected input function. If the function

has been renamed using the Function Rename

feature (see page 26), the renamed name appears

on the display.

Input Mode:

Displays the input mode set via the Function Input

Setup feature (see page 25).

Surround Mode:

Displays the status of the selected surround

mode.

Auto Display Off mode:

The display is off. But, if you make a change to

the unit such as the input or surround mode, the

display will show that change, then go back to

off after about 3 seconds. When changing the

volume, it is not displayed.

Display Off mode:

The display is off completely.

Note:

• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the

front display in display off condition.

ENGLISH

SPEAKER A/B

DIGITAL

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

MultEQ

ENTER

7.1CH INPUT

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFF

LTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

SPK-AB

SR7001 has speaker system - A and speaker

system- B for front L/R channels.

You can select these systems by pressing

SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or SPK-

AB on the remote.

7.1 CH INPUT

The SR7001 is equipped for future expansion

through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD

multichannel player or DVD-Audio player.

When this is selected, the input signals connected to

the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround

left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left)

and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1

CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and

right), center, surround (left and right) and surround

back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks

without passing through the surround circuitry.

In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer)

jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.

When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input

used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs.

This permits simultaneous viewing with video

sources

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1

1. 2.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

READY

MultEQ A/B

MEMORY CLEAR

SPEAKERS

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

7.1CH

CH.SEL

Select a desired Video source to decide the

routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.

Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front

panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote to switch

the 7.1 channel input.

If it is necessary to adjust the output level of

each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the

remote.

Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can

hear the same sound level from each speaker

at the listening position. For the front left, front

right, center, surround left, surround right and

surround back speakers, the output levels can

be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.

The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18

and +12 dB.

These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1

CH. INPUT memory.

Adjust the main volume with the MAIN VOLUME

knob or the VOL buttons on the remote.

To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1

CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH

on the remote.

Notes:

• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select

a surround mode, as the external decoder determines

processing.

• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs

when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

AUX2 INPUT

If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals

with multi channel decoder,

L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are

available as AUX2 input.

In this case, You can connect additional audio source

to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH

MODE AUTO

MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI AUTO

SLEEP

SURR

AUTO

LIP.SYNC

Depending on the image device (TV, monitor,

projector, etc.) connected to the SR7001, a time lag

can occur between image signal processing and

audio signal processing. Though minor, this time

lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment.

The LIP.SYNC feature delays the audio signal with

respect to the image signal output from the SR7001

to correct the time lag between the sound and image.

It can be operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and

2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. Set the

remote controller to the AMP mode before operating

the LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0

ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up

to 200 ms.

Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV,

monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

Note:

• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in

the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the

SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the

set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically

restored.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

ENGLISH

To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 isdisplayed.

Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

Press the GUIDE on the remote, display will

show “FREQ----”.

lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the

ten numbered keypad on the remote.

The desired station will automatically be tuned.

(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

MultEQ

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

-OFF

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

When in the auto stereo mode, AUTO indicator will

be illuminated on the display.

The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo

broadcast is tuned in.

At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the

“TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated.

If the signal is weak, it may be difﬁ cult to tune into the

station in stereo. In such a case, Press the MODE

button on the front panel. Or press the TUNER button

and press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Press the T-MODE (D4) button.

“AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo

broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST”

indicator is not illuminated.

To return to auto stereo mode, Press the MODE

button or Press T-MODE button on the remote again.

AUTO indicator is illuminated the display.

BASIC OPERATION

(TUNER)

To operate the unit from the remote control, press

the TUNER button on the remote control so that the

tuner mode is engaged.

LISTENING TO THE TUNER

Frequency scan step for AM is selectable.

Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s

standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the

front panel or TUNER button on the remote more

than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.

Note:

•

Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing

this setup.

AUTO TUNING

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI

SLEEP

AUTO

SOURCE

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

URE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3. 2.

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

(Using the SR7001)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto

tuning function.

Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

(Using the remote control unit)

To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two second on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2)

button for 1 second or more.

Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to

the “Manualtunin” operation.

MANUAL TUNING

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI

SLEEP

AUTO

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

URE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3. 2.

SOURCE

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

(Using the SR7001)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote control unit)

To select tuner, press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

Press the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN

–

(D2) button

to tune in the deseired station.

DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL

SOURCE

VOL

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

GUIDE

2 31

5 64

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

ENGLISH

PRESET SCAN

2 31

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

MUTE

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

USE

PAGE

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

CLEAR

(Using the remote control unit)

ress the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE2 is displayed

and press the P-SCAN (D4) on the remote.

“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display

and then the preset station with the lowest

preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

→ No.2 → etc.) for 5 seconds each.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

You can fast forward the preset stations, press

the > button until PAGE4 is displayed and

press the P-SET+ (D4) continuously.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by pressing

the CLEAR button or P-SCAN (D4) on the

remote.

RECALLING A PRESET STATION

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

VOL

MUTE

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

(Using the SR7001)

Select the desired preset station by pressing

the 1 or 2

cursor

buttons on the front panel.

(Using the remote control unit)

ress the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE4 is displayed

Press the P-SET+ (D4) or P-SET– (D5) button

to tune in the deseired preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

MANUAL PRESET MEMORY

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

2 31

5 64

MEMO

MultEQ

ENTER

URE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

IRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 4.

(Using the SR7001)

Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”

section).

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the

display.

Select the preset number by pressing the 1

or 2

cursor

buttons, while this is still blinking

(approx. 5 seconds)

Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The

display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

memory location.

(Using the remote control unit)

Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”

section).

Press the MEMO button on the remote. “– –“

(preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

Note:

• When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few

seconds.

PRESET MEMORY

With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations

in any order.

For each station, you can memorize the frequency

and reception mode if desired.

AUTO PRESET MEMORY

This function automatically scans the FM and AM

band and enters all stations with proper signal

strength into the memory.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 4.

1. 3.

To select FM , press the BAND button on the

front panel.

While pressing the MEMORY button, press the

1 cursor button.

“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,

and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.

Each time the tuner ﬁ nds a station, scanning

will pause and the station will be played for ﬁ ve

seconds.

During this time, the following operations are

possible.

The band can be changed by the BAND button.

If no button is pressed during this period, the

current station is memorized in location Preset

02.

If you wish to skip the current station, press the

3 cursor button during this period, this station

is skipped and auto presetting continues.

Operation stops automatically when all 50

preset memory positions are ﬁ lled or when auto

scanning attains the highest end of all bands.

If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at

anytime, press the CLEAR button.

ENGLISH

NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.

This function allows the name of each preset channel

to be entered using alphanumeric characters.

Before name inputting, you need to store preset

stations with the preset memory operation.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

ENTER

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

5. 2.

SOURCE

USE

PAGE

VOL

MUTE

LIP.SYNC

MEMO

CLEAR

THX

MEMO

Recall the preset number to be inputted name

with the method described in “Recalling” a

preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMO button on the remote for

more than 3 seconds.

The left most column of the station name

indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry

ready status.

When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on

the front panel or the SCAN+ or SCAN– buttons

on the remote control unit (page 4), alphabetic

and numeric characters will be displayed in the

following order:

A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → +

→ / → (Blank) → A

UP →

→ DOWN

SORTING PRESET STATIONS

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in

the sequential order:

I.e. the stations are stored as follows

1) 87.1 MHz

2) 93.1 MHz

3) 94.7 MHz

10) 105.9 MHz

(notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets

for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 5:

To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY

and the 4 cursor buttons.

“PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and

sorting will be done.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory

using the following procedure.

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 IN

VOLU

DOWN

MultEQ

ENTER

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

KER

LTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFF

ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3.2.

2 31

5 64

CLEAR

DSS

VCRDVD

TEST

SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

MEMO

CLEAR

MEMO

Recall the preset number to be cleared with

the method described in “Recalling” a preset

station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMO button on the remote.

The stored preset number blinks in the display

for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR

button on the front panel or the remote.

“xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate

that the specified preset number has been

cleared.

Note:

•

To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

After selecting the ﬁ rst character to be entered,

press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press

the MEMO button on the remote.

The entry in this column is ﬁ xed and the next

column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the

same way.

To move back and forth between the characters,

press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons or press CH+ or

CH– button on the remote.

Note:

• Unused columns should be filled by entering

blanks.

To save the name, press the MEMORY or

ENTER button on the front panel, or press the

MEMO button on the remote for more than 2

seconds.

Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons or

the SCAN+ and SCAN– buttons of the remote

controller unit to select characters, characters

can be input from the numeric keys of the

remote control unit. See the below table for

a correspondence between characters and

numeric keys.

Ten keypad Press, press again, press again, etc.

A → B → C → 1 → A

D → E → F → 2 → D

G → H → I → 3 → G

J → K → L → 4 → J

M → N → O → 5 → M

P → Q → R → 6 → P

S → T → U → 7 → S

V → W → X → 8 → V

Y → Z → space → 9 → Y

– → + → / → 0

ENGLISH

LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must

ﬁ rst select the input source on the SR7001.

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

DISP MULTI

SLEEP AU

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

ENTER

(Using the SR7001)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either XM or

DAB.

(Using the remote control unit)

To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Select XM or DAB with the D3 button.

CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH

AND RADIO ID

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.

Press the D1 (DISP) button four times to

display the signal status on the front display of

the SR7001.

SIGNAL:

• The display changes as shown below according to

the receiving condition.

SIGNAL: ■■■■■■

SIGNAL: STRONG

(Signal strength is good)

SIGNAL: ■■■■

SIGNAL: MARGINAL

(Signal strength is Marginal)

SIGNAL: ■■

SIGNAL: WEAK

(Signal strength is poor)

XM NO SIGNAL

SIGNAL: NON

(Loss of the signal)

Adjust the antenna location until signal strength

is good.

Select channel 0 (XM000) with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons of the SR7001 or the SCAN +

or SCAN – buttons of the remote control unit.

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

• The Radio ID is displayed.

XMOOORADIO ID

Note:

•

If “ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

the XM Connect-and-Play antenna or Passport

system may not be connected to the XM terminal on

the rear panel of this unit properly.

SWITCHING XM INFORMATION IN THE FRONT

PANEL DISPLAY

You can display XM information (such as artist name/

song title, category or signal status) for the channel

currently selected in the front panel display.

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.

Select the information with the DISP (D1)

button.

Artist name/Song title

Channel category

Channel number/name

Signal Status

When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:

XMO40:DeepTrc

40:DeepTracks

(If text is more than 13 characters long, the text is

scrolled.)

ENGLISH

When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:

NAME/TITLE

Pink Floid /

Floid / Money

The “NAME/TITLE” is displayed for 2 seconds,

followed by the artist’s name and song title.

(If artist’s name or song title is more than 13 characters

long, the text is scrolled.)

When the channel category is displayed:

CAT:Rock

Note:

• To change the display content from XM information

to SR7001 functions, do so from the display mode.

(See “DISPLAY MODE” on page 47)

This XM information can also be displayed on a TV

monitor connected to the SR7001.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

THX

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

DISP

OSD

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

AMP

Press the AMP button on the remote control

unit.

Press the OSD button. The following information

display will be output.

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :XM

SURR-MODE :AUTO

MULTIROOMA:ON SPK:OFF

MULTIROOMB:OFF SPK:OFF

MAIN VOLUME

-------------------

When this display appears, press the OSD

button again. XM information like the following

will appear.

XM INFORMATION

XM :040

CHAN :DeepTracks

NAME :Pink Floid

TITLE :Money

CAT :Rock

SIGNAL:MARGINAL

Press the OSD button again. The information

display will go out.

Note:

•

If the information contains a character that cannot

be recognized by that unit, the character will be

displayed with “ ”(space).

SEARCH MODE

You can search for the channel you want to listen to

using one of three search modes. You can also enter

the number directly to select the desired channel.

ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE

USE

PAGE

PHONES

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI T-MODE

DISPLAY

EXIT

BAND

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

(Using the SR7001)

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front

panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote control unit)

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed.

Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN− (D2)

button.

PRESET SEARCH MODE

VOL

MUTE

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PUR

POWER ON/STANDBY

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

(Using the SR7001)

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front

panel to select the desired preset station.

(Using the remote control unit)

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

CH+ or CH− button to tune in the desired

preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

ENGLISH

CATEGORY SEARCH MODE

You can select the desired channel from the category

allocated to each channel.

Category being aired can be only selected.

MultEQ

ENTER

URE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

IRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

(Using the SR7001)

Press the ENTER button on the front panel.

Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to

select the desired Category.

After selecting the Category, Press the 3 or 4

cursor button to select the desired station of the

category.

You can return to the normal mode by press the

ENTER button during Category Search Mode.

(Using the remote control unit)

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 4 is display.

Press the CAT+ (D4) or CAT− (D5) button.

After selecting the category, Press the SCAN+

(D1) or SCAN− (D2) button to select the

desired station of the category.

You can return to the normal mode by press the

OK button during Category Search Mode.

Note:

• Category search ends automatically about 5 seconds

after the last operation.

CHANNEL DIRECT CALL

You can select the desired channel by directly tapping

the numeric keypads on the remote control unit.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

GUIDE

2 31

5 64

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the GUIDE.

“XM - - -” will appear on the display.

Input the three digit number for your desired

Channel with the numeric keypad on the

remote control unit.

The desired channel will automatically be

tuned.

Note:

•

If there is no input on the keypad for 5sec., the input

is cancelled to return to the original display

Notes:

•

“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the

channel or information.

•

“UPDATING” is displayed while updating encryption

code.

•

When the selected channel is not available, “XM - -

-” is dispIayed.

•

“OFF AIR” is displayed while air is suspended (e.g.

midnight).

PRESET MEMORY

You can store the desired channel in the Preset

Memory.

(You can preset 60 XM Radio stations in addition to

FM/AM stations.)

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

E DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 4.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

2 31

5 64

MEMO

(Using the SR7001)

Tune into the desired channel.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the

dispIay.

--XM040

Select the preset number by pressing the 1

or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking

(approx. 5 seconds)

01XM040

Press the MEMORY button again to enter.

The display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the specified

preset memory location.

(Using the remote control unit)

Tune into the desired channel.

Press the MEMO button on the remote. “- -”

(preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

Note:

•

When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few

seconds.

CHECKING THE XM PRESET CHANNEL

The preset channel can be checked on the on screen

display.

VOL

USE

PAGE

3.4.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

(Using the remote control unit)

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 2 is display.

Press the P-INFO (D5) button. to view a list of

tuner preset channeI on the on screen display.

If there are 10 or more preset channel, Press

the P-lNFO button. again.

XM PRESET LIST

NO. 1 XM010 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 2 XM011 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 3 XM015 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 4 XM022 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 5 XM125 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 6 XM001 Preview

NO. 7 XM001 Preview

NO. 8 XM001 Preview

NO. 9 XM001 Preview

NO.10 XM001 Preview

Note:

•

The preset channel indication disappears in about 5

sec.

ENGLISH

PRESET SCAN

USE

PAGE

3.5.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

TUNER

2 31

5 64

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

press the P-SCAN (D4) button on the remote

control unit. “PRESET SCAN” appears on the

display and then the preset station with the

lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

→ No.2 → etc.) for about 5-10 seconds each.

The time changes by the received condition.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

Pressing the CH+ button during prescanning

speeds up scanning.

Also, pressing the CH– button returns to the

previous preset station.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by press the

P-SCAN (D4) button.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory

using the following procedure.

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

DOWN

MultEQ

ENTER

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3.2.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

MEMO

CLEAR

MEMO

CLEAR

Recall the preset number to be cleared with

the method described in ”PRESET SEARCH

MODE”.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or Press the MEMO button on the remote.

The stored preset number blinks in the display

for 5 seconds. WhiIe blinking, Press the CLEAR

button on the front panel or the remote.

“xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate

that the specified preset number has been

cleared.

Note:

• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

• There are 60 preset channels prepared at the factory

default. The 60 channels are all set to “CHANNEL

001”. Each channel can be stored in the preset

memory. You can search for only the preset

channels.

ENGLISH

MULTI ROOM

SYSTEM

The Multiroom System mode allows the same source

or different sources to be heard in two rooms other

than where this receiver is installed.

To use the multiroom system, connect the audio from

the MULTI OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to

the MULTI ROOM A and B amps.

Note:

• The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting.

Connect the VIDEO output (MULTI OUT) terminal to

the monitor in Room A.

(MULTI VIDEO OUT terminal is linked to the source

selector in Multi Room A.)

If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C

(see page 20) are not used in the room where this

receiver is installed, the multi speaker system can be

used with the amp for the surround back channel.

Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2

terminal can be used for the monitor output of Room

(This feature cannot be used with the SR7001.)

This receiver supports multiroom system functions

such as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep

timers and remote control.

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI

ROOM OUT TERMINALS

DIGITAL

LVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 1.

Pressing the MULTI button on the receiver one

time accesses the MULTI ROOM A settings.

Pressing it two times accesses the MULTI

ROOM B settings. Then, pressing it a third time

turns the multiroom feature off. (The SR7001

does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting.)

When the MULTI ROOM setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears

on the display for 10 seconds.

– SR8001 –

* Display when MULTI ROOM A is selected

MA DVD -18dB

* Display when MULTI ROOM B is selected

MB DVD -18dB

– SR7001 –

The unit enters multi room mode and the display

indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the

“MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.

Select an input source with the INPUT

SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the room used in the multi room system as you

like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features

can also be set using the MAIN MENU.

(See page 37)

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI

SPEAKER TERMINALS

The SR7001 allows you to connect another set

of speakers and place them in a different room or

separated area for Iistening to music.

DIGITAL

LVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 1.

Pressing the MULTI SPEAKER button on

the receiver one time accesses the MULTI

SPEAKER A settings. Pressing it two times

accesses the MULTI SPEAKER B settings.

Then, pressing it a third time turns the MULTI

SPEAKER feature off.

(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI SPEAKER

B setting.)

When the MULTI SPEAKER setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears

on the display for 10 seconds.

– SR8001 –

* Display when MULTI SPEAKER A is selected

MSA DVD -18dB

* Display when MULTI SPEAKER B is selected

MSB DVD -18dB

– SR7001 –

The unit enters multi room mode and the display

indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the

“MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.

Select an input source with the INPUT

SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the room used in the multiroom system as you

like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features

can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page

37.)

Notes for Multi Room Speaker

• The Multiroom Speaker mode can be set for only

one of the rooms, A or B.

• The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals can

be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE”

in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER

SETUP, page 27)

• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed

when the MULTI SPEAKER button is pressed

when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to

“NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See

SPEAKER SETUP, page 27)

• The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the

same time as the speaker C. When connecting for

multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch

on the rear panel to OFF.

ENGLISH

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS

WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A

Room A output can be operated from a room

where the receiver is not installed. This requires a

separately sold IR receiver. (For connections, see

page 12.)

USE

PAGE

123

2 31

5 64

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

USE

PAGE

VOL

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8500SR

AMP

Press MULTI on the multi room remote control

from the MULTI ROOM.

(Press the AMP button and press the > button

until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the MULTI

(D1) button.)

This operations will put the SR7001 into multi

room mode and “MULTI” will be illuminated on

the display.

MULTl ROOM Video out put will show OSD

information for the MULTI ROOM setup.

MULTI ROOM A

VIDEO :DSS

AUDIO :FM 102.00MHz

SLEEP :90 min

MONO/ST:STEREO

MULTI:OFF MAPKR:OFF

VOL :VARI VOL :VARI

LEVEL:-90dB LEVEL:-90dB

--- MAIN ROOM STATUS ---

VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD

RETURN BACK EXIT

Press the VOL+ or VOL− button on the

multi room remote control to set the desired

volume.

In multi room mode, the multi room remote

control can be used in the multiroom to operate

the following functions.

General:

Controlling volume level, sleep timer, and muting.

SeIecting input audio and video source.

Tuner:

Selecting band, controlling preset channel up and

down, tuning up and down direct frequency call.

Notes for the Multi Room System

• The MULTI ROOM OUT (MULTl OUT/MULTI

SPEAKER) has analog outputs.

This does not support digital input signals.

• If the Tuner (FM, AM or XM) is active in the main

room, you can not control any function of the tuner.

In this case, You must listen to the same station as the

main room.

• When the component with RC-5 bus is connected

to the MULTI RC IN jack(see page 20), Multiroom

A can be operated using the RC codes for the main

room. The remote control units of other Marantz

products can also be used to control multiroom A.

(Room B output cannot be operated from another

room.)

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

Press the desired function button.

• The selected function name and USE are displayed in the LCD.

Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

DVD

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

VCR

EXIT

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the DVD player on and off

POWER ON Turns the DVD player on

POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

Cursor/OK Move the cursor, enters the setting

MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Call up the programming menu

CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous chapter/

track

Stop

;

Pause

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the CD player on and off

POWER ON Turns the CD player on

POWER OFF Turns the CD player off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Switches the display information

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

Stop

;

Pause

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the VCR on and off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Call up the menu

EXIT Exits the programming menu

0-9 Input the numeric

Play

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

Stop

;

Pause

Record

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

CD-R

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

2 31

5 64

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

MEMO

CLEAR

TAPE

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the CD recorder on and off

POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on

POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Switches the display information

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

Stop

;

Pause

Record

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the MD deck on and off

POWER ON Turns the MD deck on

POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Switches the display information

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

Stop

;

Pause

Record

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the TAPE deck on and off

POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on

POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play

4 / ¢ Skip forward or previous track

Stop

;

Pause

Record

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

USE MODE

(Normal operation status)

This remote control is preset with a total of 12 types

of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television),

DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting

tuner), TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD, TAPE (tape deck),

AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (ampliﬁ er).

Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You

can use these products without setting any codes.

Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD.

DVD is shown on the LCD, and the remote control

is set for DVD.

Pressing the

SOURCE

button once changes the

remote control to the settings for the source that

was pressed.

To change the ampliﬁ er or other source, press the

SOURCE

button twice (double-click). The code

is sent, and then the amplifier source changes to

DVD.

Press the buttons to operate the DVD.

The indicator is shown on the LCD while the

remote control codes are being transmitted. It is not

displayed when buttons without stored code are

pressed.

The direct buttons can be used to perform up

to 20 operations for each of the 12 sources,

including DVD, TV, AMP, and other AV

equipment.

The buttons consist of the D1 to D5 buttons, and

the equipment is operated by pressing the buttons

corresponding to the indicators on the LCD.

Four pages are available, and press the

button

to select a page. The current page position is

displayed on the LCD.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment

products)

This remote control is preset with remote control

codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers.

The preset codes are TV, VCR, LD, CABLE, DSS,

DVD, TAPE, TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD and AMP.

Settings can be made in one of two ways.

When the preset codes are set, the following codes

are contained in the

SOURCE button of the remote

control.

See the attached manufacturer number list for the

preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and

other settings.

Remote control

source name

Corresponding

preset code

Device name

TV TV Television

DVD DVD DVD player

VCR VCR Video deck

DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting

tuner equipment

TUNER

RECEIVER/TUNER

AM FM TUNER

CD CD/CD-R PLAYER CD player

CD-R CD/CD-R PLAYER CD recorder

MD CD/CD-R PLAYER MD deck

TAPE TAPE Cassette deck

AUX1 CABLE Cable television

AUX2 LASER DISC Laser disc player

AMP AMPLIFIER Ampliﬁ er or receiver

RECEIVER/TUNER

• When using Marantz products, TV and DVD can

be set to TV1 (TV/VDP: Projector) and TV2 (PDP:

Plasma display), and DVD1 (ﬁ rst DVD player) and

DVD2 (second DVD player), respectively, to match

the customer’s operating environment. These

settings are made in PRESET mode.

In the factory default state, the remote control is

set to TV1 and DVD1. To make the presets, enter

the numbers below while referring to the section

“Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number

Directly”.

TV1: 0001, TV2: 0002

DVD1: 0001, DVD2: 0002

Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Di-

rectly

Refer to the manufacturer number list.

This example shows how to set a SAMSUNG DVD

player.

USE

PAG E

LEARN

5 6

2 3 4

View the supplied manufacturer number list,

and ﬁ nd the number of the manufacturer for the

device that you are using.

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.

The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.

Press the DVD source button.

Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-

digit manufacturer number.

Example: To enter “0600” from the manufacturer

number list.

To correct the entered number, use the

cursor button to enter the correct number.

• If no button is pressed for over one minute

during the setting process, any settings that

were made are cancelled.

Press the OK cursor button.

Confirm the OK is displayed and then the

display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).

When the manufacturer number is entered correctly,

OK is displayed momentarily on the screen.

• If you enter a number not in the manufacturer

number list, WRONG CODE is displayed,

and then you return to the preset setting

again

Check the manufacturer number list, and

either set a different number or use the

sequence function to set.

To set the manufacturer number for another

source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4

to 6.

After the settings are completed, press the M

button.

10.

Press the buttons on the remote control to

check that the DVD can be operated correctly.

Setting Equipment Not Appearing in Manufacturer

Number List

Use the sequence function to set equipment not

appearing in the manufacturer number list. You may

still be unable to set some equipment even when

using the sequence function. In this case, the remote

control can be programmed with codes individually.

In the sequence function, the power ON/OFF codes

are transmitted by pressing the remote control

buttons in order.

If the power for the equipment is left on, hold down

the button until the equipment is turned off, and then

release. This completes the setting.

This example shows how to set a DVD player.

LEARN

PAG E

4 5 7

Turn on the power of the DVD player.

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.

The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.

Press the DVD source button.

Hold down the CH+ or CH– button for one

second or more.

Press the CH+ button repeatedly in the interval

for one second.

The signal is transmitted, and the display cycles

through the code number.

Press the

CH–

button to go back to a number

screen.

Release the button once the DVD player turns

off.

Press the OK cursor button.

Confirm the OK is displayed and then the

display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).

10.

To set the manufacturer number for another

source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4

to 8.

11.

After the settings are completed, press the M

button.

12.

Press the buttons on the remote control to

check that the DVD can be operated correctly.

Check the following points if the equipment which

was set does not operate properly.

• If there is more than one number in the manufacturer

number list, try setting a different number.

• There may be some buttons which cannot be

used. Program the codes to the required buttons.

ENGLISH

LEARN MODE

Programming the

(PLAY) and Other Control But-

tons and Numeric Buttons

This remote control is capable of learning and storing

codes used by other remote controls that you already

own.

For codes which are not learned, the remote control

will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from

the initial settings, or remote codes from another

manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the

customer.

The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is

located at the top of the remote control.

This example shows how to learn the codes from the

remote control of a DVD player.

USE

PAG E

LEARN

PAG E

LEARN

1 2 4

LEARN

PAG E

LEARN

PAG E

6 (When OK) (failed) (codes are full)

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.

The LEARN setting (LEARN) is displayed. The

LEARN

indicator then blinks.

Press the DVD source button.

Press the 2 (PLAY) button.

The

LEARN

indicator blinks, and then displays to

indicate that learning is ready.

Place the receiver sensor of the remote control

(top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the

DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about

5 cm (2 inches).

Press and hold down the 2 (PLAY) button of the

transmitting DVD remote control, and check that

OK is displayed on the LCD.

The remote control has ﬁ nished learning when OK

is displayed on the LCD.

If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has

prevented the command from being learned. If this

happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.

In some rare cases, ERROR may be displayed

repeatedly during the learning operation. In this

case, the transmitting remote control may have

special signal codes. These codes cannot be

learned by this remote control.

Follow the same procedure to make the remote

control learn the other buttons.

Repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 6 to have

the remote control learn the signal codes from

a TV, CD player, or other AV equipment.

• When no buttons are pressed for

approximately one minute during the

learning operation, the remote control

automatically returns to USE mode.

• When programming the source buttons,

switch to the source in step 3, and then

press the source button again.

9. When you have finished programming the

codes for each button, press the M button.

The

USE

indicator is displayed on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be used.

• If FULL is displayed on the LCD, the

memory cannot hold any more learned

codes in LEARN mode.

If FULL is displayed no matter how many

times you try the learning operation, the

remote control cannot accept any more new

codes until some of the previously learned

codes are deleted from the memory. Delete

some of the learned buttons from the

sources.

The M button and > button cannot be taught. Only

each one code can be learned for the LIGHT buttons

1 and 2, regardless of the source.

Programming the Direct Buttons and Rewriting

Names

This example shows how to program codes from

other manufacturer products to the DVD MENU

button (D1) and change the display to OSD.

LEARN

PAG E

LEARN

PAG E

6 7 8

LEARN

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.

The LEARN setting (LEARN) indicator is displayed.

The

LEARN

indicator then blinks.

Press the DVD source button.

The first page of the direct button screen is

displayed. There are four available pages. Pressing

the > buttons cycles through the pages in this order

→

Press the D1 (MENU) direct button.

The

LEARN

indicator blinks, and then displays to

indicate that learning is ready.

Place the receiver sensor of the remote control

(top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the

DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about

5 cm (2 inches).

Press and hold down the OSD button of the

transmitting DVD remote control, and check that

OK is displayed on the LCD.

The remote control has ﬁ nished learning when OK

is displayed on the LCD.

If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has

prevented the command from being learned. If this

happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.

• After learning is completed, the remote

control automatically switches to name

rewriting mode. The left end “

” indicator

on the MENU blinks to indicate that the

blinking part can be rewritten.

• If no names will be rewritten, press the

OK cursor button. The display returns to

learning standby mode by pressing the OK

cursor button.

To change the name, press the numeric

buttonsto enter the text.

• Use the cursor buttons 1 2 to move to the

sections to be rewritten on the LCD.

• To change MENU to OSD, press the 5

numeric button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display

cycles through M → N → O → 5 → M.

After rewriting of the text is completed, press

the OK cursor button.

To delete text that is already entered, press the

button to insert a space.

• In this example, MENU is changed to “OSD

(space) (space)” in this step, and then OSD

is displayed in the right side by pressing the

OK button.

For details, refer to the section “Rewriting Names”.

In the same way, use the > button to select

the page, and then press the direct button to

program the codes.

10.

After programming the codes for each of the

buttons, press the M button.

The

USE

indicator displays on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be transmitted.

REWRITING NAMES

This remote control allows the rewriting of names

for the sources and direct buttons. This operation is

performed for each individual source.

This example shows how to change the source name

from DVD to AVD and AUDIO to SOUND.

NAME

PAG E

3 4 5

LEARN

USE

PAG E

7 8 9

NAME

PAG E

NAME

PAG E

NAME

PAG E

NAME

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .

ENGLISH

Press the DVD source button .

The

NAME

indicator blinks.

The “ ” blinks to indicate that the letter can be

changed.

Press the 2 cursor button twice.

The D in DVD blinks to indicate that the letter can

be changed.

Press the 1 numeric button to select A.

Each time the numeric buttons are pressed, the

button cycles through the alphanumeric characters

shown below.

1: A

→

2: D

→

3: G

→

4: J

→

5: M

→

6: P

→

7: S

→

8: V

→

9: Y

→

0: SPACE (

)

→

—

→

’

→

SPACE (

)

Press the 1 or 2 cursor button .

The letter is changed to “A”.

• The 3 and 4 cursor buttons can be used to

move the blinking indicator of the section to

be rewritten.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons to select

AUDIO on the direct button indicator. The

A ﬂ ashes to indicate that the name can be

changed.

Press the 7 numeric button to select S.

Each time the button is pressed, the button cycles

through S

→

Press the 2 cursor button to move the ﬂ ashing

section.

10.

Press the 5 numeric button to select 0.

11.

Follow the same procedure to enter U, N, and

12.

When ﬁ nished entering the text, press the OK

cursor button .

13.

Press the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be used.

The input is overwritten, and so the currently

displayed text is erased.

Up to six characters can be entered for the direct

button indicator.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES

(RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in ﬁ ve ways: by buttons, direct

buttons, direct button pages, sources, and by all

memory contents.

Erasing Buttons and Erasing Direct Buttons

This example shows how to erase the code learned

from the PLAY button of the DVD player and the

AUTO code of the AMP direct button.

Erasing buttons

1 3 4

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

Press the button 2 (PLAY) that you want to

erase while holding down the CLEAR button .

A message is displayed on the LCD.

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

The code programmed to the

(PLAY) button is

erased.

When the code is cleared, the code for this button

resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

display.

To erase codes programmed for the CLEAR

button, simply press the CLEAR button

twice.

To erase codes programmed for the

SOURCE button, simply press the SOURCE

button twice.

Erasing direct buttons

6 8 9

LEARN

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

Press the AMP source button .

Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page for

AMP.

Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button to be erased

while holding down the CLEAR button .

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

The code programmed to the

AUTO

button is

erased.

When the code is cleared, the code for this button

resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.

The rewritten name returns to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

screen.

10.

When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote control can now be operated.

Erasing Direct Button Pages

This example shows how to erase the entire direct

button second page learned from the DVD player.

1 3 4

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

Press the > button to display the second

page.

Press the > button while holding down the

CLEAR button .

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All codes and names programmed to page 2 are

erased. When the codes are cleared, the codes

for this button reset to the factory default code or

become blank. Any rewritten names return to the

original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

screen.

When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator lights up to indicate that the

remote control can now be operated.

Erasing Sources

This procedure clears all codes and names

programmed to the DVD, TV, or other sources. All

codes and names in the four direct button pages are

also erased.

This example shows how to erase the names and

codes learned from the DVD player.

1 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAG E

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

Press the DVD source button while holding

down the CLEAR button .

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All codes and names programmed to the DVD

source are erased. When the codes are cleared,

the codes for this button reset to the factory default

code or become blank. Any rewritten names return

to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

display.

When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote control can now be operated.

ENGLISH

Erasing All

This procedure clears (resets) all programmed

codes and names. Once all the data is cleared, the

memory is returned to the factory default status. The

programmed macros are also erased.

1 3 4

LEARN

USE

PAG E

USE

PAG E

LEARN

USE

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

Press the CLEAR button while holding down

the POWER ON and OFF buttons at the same

time.

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All programmed codes and names are erased and

reset to the factory default settings.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

screen.

• To erase all operation takes a few seconds

after the D4 (YES) button is pressed.

PROGRAMMING MACROS

This remote control can program a series of button

operations in sequence.

Macros are a function that makes it possible to use

a single button operation to perform a complex

series of button operations any number of times. A

single button can be programmed to perform up to

20 steps in sequence. A total of 20 buttons can be

programmed with macros.

• For example, the following sequence of operations

can be programmed to a macro.

Switch ampliﬁ er to DVD source → Set ampliﬁ er

mode to AUTO → Play DVD player → Switch TV

to video input

The factory default for the transmission interval

(time) between macro operations is one second,

but these signal transmission intervals can be set

between approximately 0.5 seconds and 5 seconds

in the Setup mode. Each transmission interval can

be adjusted independently when programming or

revising a macro.

Note:

• If the signal transmission interval (interval time)

is changed using the Setup mode (described later),

this transmission interval is applied to all macro

programs. To change individual signal transmission

intervals, use the procedures in this section for

programming macros and revising macros.

• No signals are transmitted while programming a

macro.

• The M button, > button, cursor buttons, MEMO

button, CLEAR button, and VOL buttons cannot

be programmed.

• If no button is pressed for approximately one

minute during programming, the remote control

returns to the state before macro mode.

In this case, the macro program is not stored.

• When executing macro mode, performing the

source switching operation two or more times

only changes the remote control mode and does

not transmit any signals. (Switching of the source

selector of the ampliﬁ er is valid only once.)

PROGRAMMING MACROS

This example shows how to program a macro to the

M-01 button.

(The screens shown in the example are the default

factory states. If the names of direct buttons

were rewritten, these modified names would be

displayed.)

Switch ampliﬁ er to DVD source → Play DVD player

→ Set the interval to 2 seconds until the next signal is

sent → Switch TV to video input → Set the ampliﬁ er

mode to AUTO

1 2 3

USE

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The menu has four pages, and so use the

button

to select the page when programming other buttons.

Press the buttons in the sequence that you

want the operations performed.

The actual program starts here.

Each time a button is pressed, the name of the

button is displayed on the LCD.

4-1 4-2 4-3

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

4-1.

Press the DVD source button .

4-2.

Press the 2 (PLAY) button .

4-3.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons .

The interval time is displayed on the LCD.

4-4.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and set to 2.0

(seconds).

• Use the 3 cursor button to increase the time

and the 4 button to decrease the time. The

interval time can be set from 0.5 seconds to

5 seconds.

• To stop the time adjustment, press the D5

(CANCEL) direct button.

4-5.

Press the OK cursor button .

4-6.

Press the TV source button .

4-7.

Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page.

4-8.

Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button .

4-9.

Press the AMP source button .

Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page.

Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button .

Press the OK cursor button .

The LCD displays END to indicate that programming

is completed.

To program another macro, repeat the

procedure in steps 3 to 4-12.

To exit macro programming, press the M button

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote control can now be operated.

When the macro are programmed 20 operations or

more, the display returns macro menu.

Edit the macro so that it has 20 operations or less.

EXECUTING MACRO PROGRAMS

1 2 3

MACRO

PAG E

MACRO

PAG E

MACRO

PAG E

Press the M button shortly.

The macro menu is displayed.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

Check that the operations of the program are

executed step by step.

The name of the operation button is displayed on

the LCD.

• The programmed section is indicated by

&. The bar indicator moves to indicate the

progress of the program.

Select DVD source

→

PLAY transmit

→

Interval

time: 2 seconds

→

Select TV

→

TV INPUT transmit

→

Select AMP

→

AUTO transmit

→

End

• To cancel transmission of the program while

it is in progress, press any button.

CHANGING NAMES OF MACRO PROGRAMS

Under the factory default settings, the names of the

macro programs are set from M-01 to M-20, but you

can change them to any desired name.

The text can have up to six characters, and it is

entered using the numeric buttons.

This example shows how to change the M-01 name

to MOVIE.

1 2 3

USE

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

4 5 6

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

ENGLISH

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The NAME is displayed.

Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .

The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.

Press the 5 numeric button to select M.

Press the 2 cursor button to next.

The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.

Press the 5 numeric button to select O.

Repeat steps 6 and 7, and then enter V, I, E

and “ (space)”.

• To make changes in the text while entering

it, use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to move to

the blinking section.

After making the changes, press the OK cursor

button.

• To change the names of other macro

programs, repeat the procedure in steps 3

to 9.

10.

To exit, press the M button.

ERASING STEPS OF MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to delete the TV and

INPUT steps from the following macro programmed

to M-01.

The program is changed from

DVD → PLAY → TIME → TV → INPUT → AMP →

AUTO

DVD → PLAY → TIME → AMP → AUTO.

1 2 3

USE

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

4 5 6

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.

Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by

The programmed section is indicated by

Press the 2 cursor button to display TV.

Press the CLEAR button .

The LCD displays CLEAR, and TV and INPUT are

deleted.

When deleting steps from a macro program, the

operations performed for a source after switching to

the source are also deleted.

If the

CLEAR

button is pressed at the INPUT

position, only the INPUT step is deleted.

The

indicator for the step is also changed.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or

2 cursor button.

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the

cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 6.

OVERWRITING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to change the macro

programmed to M-01 from

DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO

DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT.

4 6 7

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.

Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by

The programmed section is indicated by

Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is

displayed.

Press the TV source button.

TV blinks for 0.5 seconds.

Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.

INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds.

TV and INPUT are overwritten.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or

2 cursor button.

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the

cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 8.

INSERTING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to change the macro

programmed to M-01 from

DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO

DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT → AMP → AUTO

4 6 8

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

NAME

MACRO

PAG E

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button .

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by

The programmed section is indicated by

Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is

displayed.

Press the MEMO button.

Press the TV source button.

TV blinks for 0.5 seconds

Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.

INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds.

TV and INPUT are inserted.

Press the OK cursor button.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or

2 cursor button.

10.

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the

cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 9.

CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS

When clearing macros, the macros programmed to

the button are erased. Modiﬁ ed macro names are

also returned to the factory default settings. This

example shows how to clear a macro with the name

MOVIE programmed to M-02.

1 4 5

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

Press the M button for three second or more.

The macro menu is displayed.

Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .

The macro menu is displayed.

Press the D2 (MOVIE) direct button while

holding down the CLEAR button.

Press the D4 (YES) direct button to clear the

macro.

To cancel the clearing operation, press the

(D5

button).

To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the

cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 2 to 4.

ENGLISH

SETTING THE MACRO TIMER

Setting the macro timer enables the macro program

to automatically turn the power for a device on or off

or perform other operations.

In the settings, you can select to execute the macro

timer everyday or only once.

Be sure to set the clock to the correct time before

using the timer. The macro timer can only be set for

one program a day.

This example shows how to use the timer only once

at 20:35 to execute a macro programmed to M-01.

2 3 4

USE

PAG E

123

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

LEARN

MACRO

123

5 6

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

123

LEARN

MACRO

PAG E

123

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the third page

TIMER menu.

Press the D2 (ONCE?) direct button.

The M-TMR menu is displayed on the LCD.

• To cancel timer operation, press CANCEL.

Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The time which is set previously is displayed.

Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the

hour indicator to 20.

Press the 3 and 5 numeric button to set the

minute indicator to 35.

Press the OK cursor button.

This ﬁ nalizes the time.

To exit, press the M button.

To cancel the macro timer, return to the TIMER

menu and press the D5 (CANCEL) and then press

D1 (M-01).

EXECUTING THE MACRO TIMER

The macro program starts when the time that was

set is reached. The TIMER

indicator lights up

whenever the macro timer is activated.

Note:

• To execute the macro timer, place the remote

control facing the infrared sensor of the device to

be operated. If the remote control is not in a suitable

position, it may not operate the device properly.

CLONE MODE

CREATING COPIES USING CLONE MODE

All of the codes programmed to the RC8001SR

remote control can be copied to another RC8001SR

using a few simple operations.

• The remote control can copy the entire contents or

the contents for speciﬁ c source buttons.

• When copying the entire contents, all programmed

codes, modiﬁ ed names, programmed macros, and

signal transmission intervals are copied.

When copying the contents for source buttons,

the programmed codes and modiﬁ ed names are

copied.

Note:

• The clone function can only be used for copying

when using the same model (RC8001SR) for both

the transmitting and receiving remote control.

COPYING ENTIRE CONTENTS

3 4 9

PAG E

123

PAG E

123

NAME

PAG E

5 6 9

PAG E

123

PAG E

123

Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote control (top) so that it is facing the

transmitter of the transmitting remote control

(top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

Hold down the M button of the transmitting

remote control for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D3 (TX) direct button.

The transmitting side is now ready.

Hold down the M button of the receiving remote

control for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D1 (RX) direct button.

The receiving side is now ready.

Press the OK cursor button on the receiving

remote control.

Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting

remote control.

When copying is started, the bar indicators on both

LCDs start to move from the left to the right.

• When the copying operation is completed,

TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the

transmitting remote control, and RX OK

is displayed on the LCD of the receiving

remote control.

• Do not touch either of the remote controls

during the copying operation. Doing so

could cause copying to fail.

• If the copying fails in the middle of the

copying process, RX ERROR is displayed

on the receiving remote control. Check and

perform steps 1 to 7 again.

• Copying takes about three minutes to

complete when the transmitting remote

control has been programmed to 100%

capacity.

10.

Once copying is completed, press the M button

on both remote controls.

COPYING BY SOURCE

The 12 sources can be copied on a source by source

basis. You can select from up to 12 source types.

6 7 8

PAG E

123

LEARN

123

PAG E

123

Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote control (top) so that it is facing the

transmitter of the transmitting remote control

(top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

Hold down the M button of the transmitting

remote control for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D3 (TX) direct button.

The transmitting side is now ready.

Hold down the M button of the receiving remote

control for three seconds or more.

Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

Press the D2 (RX-S) direct button.

Press the source button to be copied.

The receiving side is now ready.

The name of the source which was pressed is

displayed on the LCD.

• Each time the source button is pressed, the

name is displayed on the LCD.

Press the OK cursor button on the receiving

remote control.

10.

Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting

remote control.

When copying is started, the bar indicators on both

LCDs start to move from the left to the right.

• When the copying operation is completed,

TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the

transmitting remote control, and RX OK

is displayed on the LCD of the receiving

remote control.

• Do not touch either of the remote controls

during the copying operation. Doing so

could cause copying to fail.

ENGLISH

• If the copying fails in the middle of the

copying process, ERROR is displayed on

the remote control.

Check and perform steps 1 to 7 again.

11.

Once copying is completed, press the M button

on both remote controls.

SETUP

SETTING THE LIGHTING TIME

• The LCD lights up when the LIGHT buttons are

pressed. The LCD remains lit while the pressed

button is held down, and it goes off when the

button is released.

• The LCD continues to light up if another button

is pressed while it is lit or if pressed within two

seconds after the light goes off.

• The lighting time can be set in one-second units

from 0 to 60 seconds.

The LIGHT buttons have light-absorbing properties

that enable them to store light. If the buttons are no

longer illuminated in a dimly lit environment, bring the

buttons near a ﬂ uorescent lamp or other light source

for a sufﬁ cient amount of time. This should illuminate

the buttons again.

• The LIGHT buttons consist of a LIGHT1 and

LIGHT2 button, and they both perform the same

operation.

The factory default lighting time is set to 15

seconds.

This example shows how to set the lighting time to

20 seconds.

PAG E

2 3 4

LEARN

123

LEARN

123

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

Press the D1 (LIGHT) direct button .

The LIGHT is displayed on the LCD

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the

lighting time.

Press the OK cursor button to enter the lighting

time.

Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

SETTING THE MACRO INTERVAL TIME

When a macro program is executed, control signals

are transmitted in sequence. This transmission

interval (interval time) can be set in 0.5-seconds units

from 0.5 to 5 seconds.

If the interval time is set in this Setup mode, the

interval times for all programmed macros are

changed. If necessary, use EDIT (see page 64) in the

macro program to change the individual transmission

times.

The factory default setting for the transmission

interval is 1 second.

This example shows how to set the interval time to

5 seconds.

PAG E

2 3 4

LEARN

123

LEARN

123

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

Press the D2 (I-TIME) direct button.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the

interval time.

Holding down the cursor button fast-forwards the

time indicator.

Press the OK cursor button to enter the interval

time.

Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST

The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted. Adjust

for maximum visibility according to your viewing

environment.

PAG E

2 3 4

LEARN

123

LEARN

123

Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

Press the D3 (CONT) direct button .

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button and set the

display contrast for maximum visibility.

The adjustment has 10 levels.

The factory default setting for the contrast is the ﬁ fth

level.

Press the OK cursor button to enter the display

contrast.

Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING

In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:

1. Are the connections made properly ?

2. Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?

3. Are the power ampliﬁ ers and speaker working properly ?

If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.

If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the

internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz

authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

SR7001 cannot be turned

up.

The power plug is not connected.

Connect the power plug to the outlet.

No sound and picture are

output even when power is

on.

Mute is on.

Cancel mute using the remote control unit.

The input cable is not connected

correctly.

See the connection diagram and connect the cables

correctly.

The master volume control is turned all

the way down.

Adjust the master volume.

The function selector position is wrong.

Select correct position.

No speaker output. The headphones are connected to the

headphone jack.

Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not

output sound when headphones are connected.)

Incorrect Audio or Video for

selected source.

Input cable connected incorrectly.

Connect the cable correctly by referring to the

connection diagram.

Incorrect Audio from a

channel.

Speaker cable connected incorrectly.

Connect the cable correctly by referring to the

connection diagram.

No Audio output from the

center channel speaker.

The center speaker cable connection is

incomplete.

Connect the cable correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround

mode.

When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no

sound will be output from the center speaker. Set

another Surround mode.

Center = NONE has been selected in

SETUP mode.

Make the correct setting.

No Audio output from the

surround speakers.

The surround speaker cable connection

is incomplete.

Connect the cable correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround

mode.

When STEREO has been selected for Surround

mode, no sound will be output from the surround

speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Surround = NONE has been selected in

SETUP mode.

Make the correct setting.

No Audio output from the

surround back speakers.

The surround back speaker cable

connection is incomplete.

Connect the cable correctly.

Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.

Set surround mode EX/ES.

Surround back = NONE has been

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Make the correct setting.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Can not select EX/ES mode. Surround center= NONE has been

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Make the correct setting.

Input signal is incompatible.

Use 5.1channel source.

Can not select Pro Logic IIx

mode.

Input signal is incompatible.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input

signal or analog input signal.

Can not select Neo:6 mode. Input signal is incompatible.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input

signal or analog input signal.

Can not select CSII mode. Input signal is incompatible.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input

signal or analog input signal.

No output to Subwoofer Out. Subwoofer = NONE has been selected

in SETUP mode.

Select Subwoofer = YES.

Noise is produced during

DTS-encoded CD or laser

disc play.

Analog has been selected for input.

Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital

input, then play.

A speciﬁ c channel does not

produce output.

Nothing recorded on source.

Check the encoded channel on the source side.

FM or AM reception fails. Antenna connection is incomplete.

Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas

to FM and AM antenna outlets.

Noise is heard during AM

reception.

Reception is affected by other electrical

ﬁ elds.

Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna

is set up.

Noise is heard during FM

reception.

The radio waves from the broadcasting

station are weak.

Install an FM outdoor antenna.

Cannot get programmed

station when the PRESET

button is pressed.

Preset data has been erased.

Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time

will erase preset data. If that happens, input the

preset data again.

Control with the remote

control unit fails.

Batteries are consumed.

Replace all the batteries with new ones.

Remote controller's function-key setting

is wrong.

Select different position from which equipment will

be controlled.

The distance between this SR7001 and

the remote commander is too far.

Move closer to this SR7001.

Something is blocking SR7001 and the

remote commander.

Remove offending object.

Auto Setup (SPEAKER

SETUP) is not working.

Headphones are connected.

Disconnect the headphones.

Note:

• After “PROTECT” appears on the unit’s display, the standby indicator may start ﬂ ashing. If it does, there is a

problem in the unit or the connection. If this problem reoccurs even when power is activated from the remote control

unit, call for servicing.

ENGLISH

HDMI

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The display does not

appear over an HDMI

connection.

The connected monitor or projector

does not support HDCP.

The HDMI input of on the TV is

not on.

Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as

explained in the TV's instruction manual.

The HDMI output on the source

component (DVD, Set Top Box,

etc.) is not on.

Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as

explained in the source component's

instruction manual.

The HDMI mode is not correctly

set on the SR7001/SR8001.

Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT

SETUP menu as explained on page 25.

The HDMI output video resolution

of the source component (DVD,

Set Top Box, etc.) does not match

the TV speciﬁ cations.

Set the resolution so that it matches, as

explained in the instruction manuals of both

components.

The device is connected with a

non-standard HDMI cable.

A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to

ensure stable operation and prevent image

quality deterioration.

Power to the SR7001/SR8001 is

off. (When the SR7001/SR8001

is on standby, HDMI connections

cannot be turned on.)

Turn on the power to the SR7001/

SR8001.

The connection between

HDMI components was not

authenticated.

Shut off and then turn the power back on

to the SR7001/SR8001, TV and source

component.

Time is needed for the

display of an HDMI

connection to appear.

The connection is being

authenticated between the HDMI

devices.

There is nothing wrong with the system.

Some HDMI devices require time for

authentication.

Audio is not played

back over an HDMI

connection.

The HDMI audio output of the

source component (DVD, Set

Top Box, etc.) is not on.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns

on, as explained in the source component's

instruction manual.

The signal format of the source

component (DVD, Set Top Box,

etc.) is not supported by the

SR7001/SR8001.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it

can connect to the SR7001/SR8001,

as explained in the source component's

instruction manual.

The SR7001/SR8001 is set to

the HDMI audio “THROUGH”

mode.

In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not

produced from the SR7001/SR8001. Set it

to “ENABLE”. (see page 36)

DVD-Audio is not played

back over an HDMI

connection.

The DVD player does not support

CPPM, therefore it cannot output

HDMI audio.

• Use a DVD-Audio player that supports

CPPM.

• Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD

player.

• Use an analog connection.

TROUBLESHOOTING

If a problem should arise, ﬁ rst check the following.

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Have you operated the receiver according to the operating instructions?

3. Are the speakers and other components operating properIy?

If this unit is not operating properly, Check the items listed in the table beIow. Should the problem persist, there

may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

“ANTENNA” is displayed. XM terminal and the XM Connect-and-

Play antenna or Passport system is not

properly connected.

Check that the connection are correct.

“NO SIGNAL” is displayed. The signal cannot be received. Reposition your XM Connect-and-Play

antenna.

Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1. The XM Tuner is not activated. Contact XM Radio.

ENGLISH

DIMENSIONS

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUT O TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

7-1/4 ins.

(184 mm)

9/16 ins.

(14 mm)

6-3/4 ins.

(170 mm)

17-5/16 ins. (440 mm)

13/16 ins.

(20 mm)

7/8ins

(22 mm)

13-15/16 ins

(354 mm)

14-13/16 ins

(396 mm)

GENERAL MALFUNCTION

If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because

an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has

corrupted the information in the equipment memory

circuits. Therefore:

- disconnect the plug from the AC line supply

- after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect

the plug to the AC line supply

- re-attempt to operate the equipment

Memory backup

• In case a power outage occurs or the power

cord is accidentally unplugged, the SR7001

is equipped with a backup function to prevent

memory data such as the preset memory

from being erased.

HOW TO RESET THE UNIT

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

READY

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE

MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP

SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal,

reset the unit with the following procedure.

The SR7001 is turned on, press and hold the MULTI

+ SPEAKERS A/B buttons simultaneously for 3

seconds or more.

Remember that the procedure will reset the settings

of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time,

TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

FM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ................................87.5 – 108.0 MHz

Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf

Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB

Distortion ......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %

Stereo Separation .........................................1 kHz 45 dB

Alternate Channel Selectivity .................± 300 kHz 60 dB

Image Rejection .........................................98 MHz 70 dB

Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, ± 75 kHz Dev 800 mV

AM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ................................... 520 – 1710 kHz

Signal to Noise Ratio ..............................................50 dB

Usable Sensitivity .........................................Loop 400µV

Distortion ...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %

Selectivity .................................................± 20 kHz 70 dB

AUDIO SECTION

SR7001

Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Center ................................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Center ................................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

SR8001

Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Center ................................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Center ................................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Input Sensitivity/Impedance ...............168 mV/ 47 Kohms

Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ....105 dB

Frequency Response

(Analog Input / Pure Direct)

...........................................8 Hz – 100 kHz (± 3 dB)

(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)

............................................ 8 Hz – 45 kHz (± 3 dB)

VIDEO

Television Format ....................................................NTSC

Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Output Level/Impedance .........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)

Video Frequency (Component)

....5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)

S/N ..........................................................................60 dB

HDMI

Version ...........................................................1.2 [INPUT]

...........................................................1.1 [OUTPUT]

GENERAL

Power Requirement ................................AC 120 V 60 Hz

Power Consumption .................................6.3A (SR7001)

..........................................................6.5A (SR8001)

Weight ..................................33.1 lbs (15.0 Kg) (SR7001)

.....................................33.1 lbs (15.0 Kg) (SR8001)

ACCESSORIES

Remote Control Unit RC8001SR ................................... 1

Microphone ................................................................... 1

AAA-size batteries ........................................................ 3

FM Antenna ................................................................... 1

AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1

Front AUX Jack Cover .................................................. 1

AC cable ....................................................................... 1

Speciﬁ cations subject to change without prior notice.

SETUP CODES

AMPLIFIER

Source button name : AMP

Brand name Setup code

Amstrad 0105

Arcam 0296

Audiolab 0296

Carver 0296

GE 0105

Genexxa 0422

Grundig 0296

Harman/Kardon 0919

JVC 0358

Left Coast 0919

Linn 0296

Magnavox 0296

Marantz 0919, 0296

Micromega 0296

Myryad 0296

Optimus 0422

Panasonic 0335

Philips 0919, 0296

Pioneer 0040

Polk Audio 0919, 0296

Realistic 0422

Revox 0296

Sony 0247

Soundesign 0105

Technics 0335

Thorens 0296

Victor 0358

Wards 0105, 0040

Yamaha 0381

RECEIVER/TUNER

Source button name : AMP, TUNER

Brand name Setup code

ADC 0558

Aiwa 1432, 0185, 1116, 1415, 1668

Alco 1417

Anam 1636

Apex Digital 1284

Audiolab 1216

Audiotronic 1216

Audiovox 1417

Bose 1256

Cambridge 1397

Soundworks

Capetronic 0558

Carver 1216, 1116

Centrex 1284

Denon 1387

Ferguson 0558

Fine Arts 1216

Grundig 1216

RECEIVER/TUNER

Source button name : AMP, TUNER

Brand name Setup code

Harman/ Kardon 0137, 1331

Integra 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522

KLH 1417, 1439

Kenwood 1340, 1054

MCS 0066

Magnavox 1216, 1296, 0558, 1116

Marantz 1216, 0066, 1116, 1316

Micromega 1216

Musicmagic 1116

Myryad 1216

NAD 0347

Norcent 1416

Onkyo 0162, 0869, 1325

Optimus 1050, 0558

Panasonic 1545, 0066, 1315, 1790

Philips 1216, 1296, 1116, 1293, 1295, 1310, 1316

Pioneer 1050, 0041, 0558, 1411

Polk Audio 1316

Proscan 1281

Quasar 0066

RCA 1050, 1636, 1281, 0558, 1417

Saba 0558

Sansui 1116

Schneider 0558

Sony 1085, 0185, 1185, 1685, 1785

Stereophonics

1050

Sunﬁ re 1340

Teac 1417

Technics 1335, 1545, 0066, 1336

Telefunken 0558

Thomson 1281

Thorens 1216

Uher 0558

Venturer 1417

Victor 0101

Wards 0185, 0041

Yamaha 0203, 1203, 1358

CABLE

Source button name : AUX1

Brand name Setup code

ABC 0030, 0035

Americast 0926

Bell South 0926

Birmingham Cable 0303

Communications

British Telecom

0030

Cable & Wireless 1095

Daeryung 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035

Director 0503

Filmnet 0470

General 0503, 0837, 0303,

CABLE

Source button name : AUX1

Brand name Setup code

GoldStar 0171

Hamlin 0036, 0300

Instrument 0030

Jerrold 0503, 0837, 0303, 0030

LG 0171

MNet 0470

Memorex 0027

Motorola 0503, 0837, 0303, 1133

NTL 1095

Noos 0844

Ono 1095

PVP Stereo 0030

Visual Matrix

Pace 0264, 1087, 1095

Panasonic 0027, 0035, 0134

Paragon 0027

Philips 0332, 0344

Pioneer 0904, 1904, 0171, 0560

Pulsar 0027

Quasar 0027

Regal 0306, 0300

Runco 0027

Sagem 0844

Samsung 0027, 0171

Scientiﬁ c Atlanta 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035

Sony 1033

Starcom 0030

Supercable 0303

TS 0030

Tele+1 0470

Telewest 1095

Torx 0030

Toshiba 0027

Trans PX 0303

United Cable 0030

Zenith 0027, 0552, 0926

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code

@sat 1327

ABsat 0150

Alba 0482

AlphaStar 0799

Amstrad 0874

Aston 0169, 1156

Astro 0200

Atsat 1327

Avalon 0423

Blaupunkt 0200

British Sky 0874, 1202

Broadcasting

Canal Digital 0880

Canal Satellite

0880

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code

Canal+ 0880

Chaparral 0243

Citycom 1203

Connexions 0423

Crossdigital 1136

Cyrus 0227

D-box 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

Daeryung 0423

Daewoo 1323

Digenius 0326

DirecTV 0419, 0593, 0666, 1169, 0274, 0776, 1776, 0751,

0846, 1883, 1103, 1136

Dish Network System 1032, 0802

DishPro 1032, 0802

Distratel 0111

Dream Multimedia 1264

Echostar 1032, 0802, 0194, 0423, 0637, 0880, 0898, 1113

Engel 1044

Expressvu 0802

FTE 0890

Finlux 0482

Fracarro 0898

Fuba 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

Galaxis 0890, 1138

General Instrument 0896

Gold Box 0880

Grundig 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

Hirschmann 0200, 0423

Hitachi 0846, 0482

Hughes

1169, 0776, 1776

Network Systems

Humax 0890, 1203

InVideo 0898

JVC 0802

Kathrein 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248

Kreiselmeyer 0200

Labgear 1323

Logix 1044

Lorenzen 0326

Magnavox 0751, 0749

Manhattan 0482, 1044, 1110

Marantz 0227

MediaSat 0880

Memorex 0751

Metronic 0111

Mitsubishi 0776

Motorola 0896

Myryad 0227

Next Level 0896

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code

Nokia 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750

OctalTV 1032

Orbitech 1127

Pace 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350

Panasonic 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347

Panda 0482

Paysat 0751

Philips 1169, 0776, 1776, 0751, 1103, 0749, 0160, 0227,

0482, 0880

Pioneer 0880

Promax 0482

Proscan 0419, 0593

RCA 0419, 0593, 0882, 0170

RFT 0227

RadioShack 0896

Radiola 0227

Radix 0423

SKY 0883, 0874, 1202

SM Electronic 1227

Sabre 0482

Sagem 0847, 1141, 1280

Samsung 1303, 1136, 1044, 1319

Sat Control 1327

Satstation 1110

Schwaiger 1138

Seemann 0423

Siemens 0200

Sony 0666, 1666, 0874

Star Choice 0896

Strong 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

Tantec 0482

TechniSat 1126, 1127

Telestar 1127

Thomson 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318

Topﬁ eld 1233

Toshiba 0776, 1776, 0817

UltimateTV 0419, 0666

Uniden 0751, 0749

Universum 0200

Ventana 0227

Wisi 0200, 0423, 0482

XSat 0150

Zehnder 1102

Zenith 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

Source button name : TAPE

Brand name Setup code

Aiwa 0056

Carver 0056

Grundig 0056

Harman/Kardon 0056

Magnavox 0056

Marantz 0056

Myryad 0056

Optimus 0054

Philips 0056

Pioneer 0054

Polk Audio 0056

RCA 0054

Revox 0056

Sansui 0056

Sony 0270

Thorens 0056

Wards 0054

LASER DISK

Source button name : AUX2

Brand name Setup code

Carver 0091

Denon 0086

Marantz 0091

Mitsubishi 0086

NAD 0086

Nagsmi 0086

Optimus 0086

Philips 0091

Pioneer 0086

Salora 0091

Sony 0228

Telefunken 0086

CD/CD-R PLAYER

Source button name : CD, CDR, MD

Brand name Setup code

Aiwa 0184

Arcam 0184

Audio Research 0184

AudioTon 0184

Audiolab 0184

Audiomeca 0184

Cairn 0184

California Audio Labs 0056

Carver 0184, 0206

Cyrus 0184

DKK 0027

DMX Electronics

0184

Denon 0900

Dynamic Bass

0206

Emerson 0332

Fisher 0206

CD/CD-R PLAYER

Source button name : CD, CDR, MD

Brand name Setup code

Genexxa 0059, 0332

Goodmans 0332

Grundig 0184

Harman/ Kardon 0184, 0200

Hitachi 0059

JVC 0099

Kenwood 0708, 0653, 0055, 0064

Krell 0184

LXI 0332

Linn 0184

MCS 0056

Magnavox 0184, 0332

Marantz 0653, 0056, 0184

Matsui 0184

Memorex 0332

Meridian 0184

Micromega 0184

Miro 0027

Mission 0184

Myryad 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

Naim 0184

Onkyo 0895

Optimus 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332

Panasonic 0056

Philips 0653, 0184

Pioneer 0059, 0332

Polk Audio 0184

Proton 0184

QED 0184

Quad 0184

Quasar 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

Realistic 0206

Revox 0184

Rotel 0184

SAE 0184

Sansui 0184, 0332

Sanyo 0206

Scott 0332

Sears 0332

Sharp 0888, 0064

Simaudio 0184

Sonic Frontiers

0184

Sony 0517, 0027

Symphonic 0332

AG McLaren

0184

Tandy 0059

Technics 0056

Thorens 0184

Thule 0184

Universum 0184

Victor 0099

Wards 0184

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

MARANTZ 0001

TV1 (TV, VDP)

MARANTZ 0002

TV2 (Plasma)

AGB 0543

AOC 0478, 0120, 0207, 0087, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0119,

0135

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

Acura 0036

Addison 0119, 0135, 0680

Admiral 0120, 0490, 0190

Advent 0788

Aiko 0119

Akai 0839, 0729, 0057, 0036, 0235, 0388, 0543

Akura 0291

Alba 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695

America Action

0207

Ampro 0778

Amstrad 0198, 0036, 0064, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543

Anam 0277, 0207, 0036

Anam National

0277, 0677

Anitech 0036

Apex Digital 0775, 0792, 0794

Audiosonic 0064, 0136

Audiovox 0478, 0207, 0119, 0650

Bang & Olufsen

0592

Basic Line 0036

Baur 0064, 0388, 0539

Baysonic 0207

Beaumark 0205

Beko 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742

Bell & Howell 0181

Beon 0064

Blaupunkt 0222

Blue Sky 0695, 1064

Bondstec 0274

Bradford 0207

Brandt 0136, 0362

Broksonic 0263, 0490

Bush 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

Candle 0057

Carnivale 0057

Carver 0081, 0197

Cascade 0036

Cathay 0064

Celebrity 0027

Celera 0792

Centurion 0064

Changhong 0792

Ching Tai 0036, 0119

iii

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Chun Yun 0027, 0207, 0036, 0119

Chung Hsin 0207, 0080, 0135

Cimline 0036

Cineral 0478, 0119

Citizen 0087, 0057, 0119

Clarion 0207

Clarivox 0064

Clatronic 0274, 0397

Condor 0347, 0397

Conrac 0835

Contec 0207, 0036

Craig 0207

Crosley 0081

Crown 0207, 0036, 0064, 0397, 0445

Curtis Mathes 0074, 0081, 0181, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0729, 0057,

0172, 0193, 1174, 1374

Daewoo 0181, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1688, 0036, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0197, 0401, 0650, 0661

Dansai 0064

Dayton 0036

De Graaf 0235, 0575

Decca 0064, 0543

Denon 0172

Digatron 0064

Dixi 0036, 0064

Dumont 0044

Dwin 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

Elbe 0286

Electroband 0027

Elin 0064, 0575

Elite 0347

Elta 0036

Emerson 0181, 0263, 0490, 0207, 0205, 0388, 0650

Envision 0057, 0840

Epson 0860

Erres 0064

Ether 0057, 0036

Etron 0036

Europhon 0543

Ferguson 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587

Fidelity 0388

Finlandia 0235, 0373

Finlux 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543

Firstar 0263, 0036

Firstline 0036, 0274, 0695

Fisher 0181, 0131, 0235, 0397

Flint 0482

Formenti 0064, 0347

Fortress 0120

Frontech 0190, 0274, 0291

Fujitsu 0710, 0836

Funai 0207, 0198, 0291

Futuretech 0207

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

GE 0074, 0078, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0119,

0587, 1174, 1374

GEC 0064, 0543

Gateway 1782, 1783

Geloso 0036

Genexxa 0190

Gibralter 0044, 0057

GoldStar 0181, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0136, 0404

Goodmans 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661

Gorenje 0397

Gradiente 0080, 0197

Graetz 0190, 0388

Granada 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543

Grandin 0637

Grundig 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614

Grunpy 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

Hallmark 0205

Hankook 0207, 0057, 0205

Hanseatic 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583

Hantarex 0543

Harman/Kardon

0081

Harvard 0207

Havermy 0120

Hello Kitty 0478

Hinari 0036, 0064

Hisawa 0482

Hitachi 0057, 0205, 1172, 0172, 1283, 0036, 0119,

0132,0136, 0190, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605

Hua Tun 0036

Huanyu 0401

Hypson 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

Imperial 0274, 0397, 0445

Indiana 0064

Inﬁ nity 0081

Ingelen 0190

Inno Hit 0543

Innova 0064

Inteq 0044

Interfunk 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539

Intervision 0064, 0291, 0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0490, 0080, 0398, 0680, 0710

Jean 0183, 0078, 0263, 0036, 0119

Jensen 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0207, 0057

Kaisui 0036

Kapsch 0190

Karcher 0637

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Kathrein 0583

Kendo 0064

Kenwood 0057

Kneissel 0286, 0462

Kolin 0207, 0080, 0135

Korpel 0064

Koyoda 0036

L&S Electronic

0835

LG 0087, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0135, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205

Leyco 0064, 0291

Liesenk & Tter 0064

Loewe 0539

Luxor 0383, 0388

M Electronic 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0177, 0057, 0205

MTC 0087, 0057, 0539

Magnadyne 0274, 0543

Magnafon 0543

Magnavox 0081, 0057, 1481, 1281

Manesth 0291, 0347

Mark 0064

Matsui 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543

Matsushita 0277, 0677

Mediator 0064

Medion 0695, 0835, 1064

Megatron 0205, 0172

Memorex 0181, 0277, 0490, 0177, 0205, 0036, 1064

Metz 0474

Micromaxx 0835

Microstar 0835

Midland 0074, 0044, 0078

Minerva 0514

Minoka 0439

Mitsubishi 0181, 0277, 0120, 0263, 0207, 0177, 1277, 0057,

0205, 0135, 0539, 0863

Mivar 0318, 0319, 0543, 0636

Motorola 0120

Multitech 0207, 0036

Myryad 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893

NEC 0181, 0183, 0078, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0197, 0482,

0524, 1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

Neckermann 0064, 0583

Netsat 0064

Newave 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119

Nikkai 0064, 0291

Nikko 0057, 0205, 0119

Nokia 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658

Norcent 0775, 0851

Nordmende 0136, 0314, 0587

Oceanic 0190, 0388

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Onwa 0207, 0460

Optimus 0181, 0277, 0193, 0677

Optonica 0120

Orion 0263, 0490, 0064, 0347, 0543

Osaki 0291, 0439

Otto Versand 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583

Palladium 0397, 0445

Panama 0291

Panasonic 0081, 0277, 0078, 0064, 0190, 0677, 1437

Pathe Cinema

0265, 0347

Pausa 0036

Penney 0074, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0057, 0205, 1374

Perdio 0347

Philco 0081, 0490, 0207, 0057, 0205, 0172, 1688, 0064,

0274

Philips 0081, 0027, 0078, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0064, 0119,

0135, 0401, 0583, 0717

Phonola 0064

Pilot 0057

Pioneer 0193, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893

Portland 0119

Prandoni-Prince 0543

Prima 0788

Prism 0078

Profex 0036, 0388

Proscan 0074

Protech 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695

Proton 0057, 0205, 0036

Pulsar 0044

Quasar 0277, 0078, 0677

Quelle 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539

R-Line 0064

RCA 0074, 0027, 0057, 0205, 1474, 1481, 0117, 0119,

0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1574

RFT 0455

RadioShack 0074, 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205

Radiola 0064

Radiomarelli 0543

Realistic 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205

Rediffusion 0388

Reoc 0741

Revox 0064

Rex 0190, 0286, 0291

Roadstar 0036, 0291, 0445

Runco 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

Saba 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362

Saccs 0265

Sagem 0637

Saisho 0036, 0291, 0543

Salora 0190, 0383, 0388, 0575

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Sambers 0543

Sampo 0181, 0120, 0057, 0205, 0198, 0036, 0119, 0677,

1782

Samsung 0181, 0087, 0839, 0729, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0064,

0117, 0119, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0793,

0841

Sansei 0478

Sansui 0490

Sanyo 0181, 0207, 0131, 0235, 0366, 0826

Schaub Lorenz

0388

Schneider 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695

Scotch 0205

Scott 0263, 0207, 0205

Sears 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205, 0198

Seleco 0190, 0286

Semivox 0207

Semp 0183

Sharp 0120, 0057, 0677

Shen Ying 0036, 0119

Sheng Chia 0120, 0263, 0036

Siarem 0543

Siemens 0064, 0222

Sinudyne 0543

Skantic 0383

Skygiant 0207

Skyworth 0064

Solavox 0190

Sonitron 0235

Sonoko 0036, 0064

Sonolor 0190, 0235

Sontec 0064

Sony 1127, 0027, 0677, 0861, 1532, 1678

Soundesign 0207, 0205

Soundwave 0064, 0445

Sowa 0183, 0078, 0087, 0205, 0119

Squareview 0198

Standard 0036

Starlite 0207

Stern 0190, 0286

Supreme 0027

Sylvania 0081, 0057, 0198

Symphonic 0207, 0198

Synco 0027, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0205, 0119

Sysline 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCi 0044

TVS 0490

Tacico 0205, 0036, 0119

Tai Yi 0036

Tandy 0120, 0190

Tashiko 0119, 0677

Tatung 0081, 0181, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0036, 0064, 0543

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Teac 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064

Tec 0274

Technema 0347

Technics 0277, 0078, 0677

Techwood 0078

Teco 0078, 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119, 0291, 0680

Teknika 0081, 0207, 0177, 0087, 0119

Telefunken 0729, 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652

Telemeister 0347

Teletech 0036

Tensai 0347

Tera 0057

Thomson 1474, 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652

Thorn 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539

Toshiba 0181, 0183, 0087, 1283, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859,

1383, 1683, 1731

Triumph 0543

Tuntex 0057, 0036, 0119

Uher 0347

Universum 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519

Vector Research 0057

Vestel 0064

Victor 0277, 0080, 0677, 0680

Videosat 0274

Vidikron 0081

Vidtech 0205

ViewSonic 1782

Vision 0347

Voxson 0190

Waltham 0383

Wards 0081, 0057, 0205, 0893

Watson 0064, 0347

Waycon 0183

White Westinghouse 0490, 0064, 0347,0650

Yamaha 0057, 0796, 0860

Yapshe 0277

Yoko 0064, 0291

Zenith 0044, 0490, 0205, 0119

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

ASA 0064, 0108

Admiral 0075

Adventura 0027

Aiko 0305

Aiwa 0064, 0027, 0334, 0375, 0379

Akai 0068, 0342

Akiba 0099

Alba 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379

America Action

0305

American High 0062

Amstrad 0027

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Anam 0064, 0267, 0305, 0253, 0507

Anam National 0253, 1589

Anitech 0099

Asha 0267

Asuka 0064

Audiovox 0064, 0305

Baird 0027, 0131, 0068

Basic Line 0099, 0305

Beaumark 0267

Bell & Howell 0131

Blaupunkt 0253

Brandt 0347

Brandt Electronic 0068

Broksonic 0211, 0375, 1506

Bush 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

Calix 0064

Canon 0062

Carver 0108

Cimline 0099

Cineral 0305

Citizen 0064, 0305, 1305

Colt 0099

Combitech 0379

Craig 0064, 0074, 0267, 0099

Crown 0099, 0305

Curtis Mathes 0087, 0062, 0068, 1062

Cybernex 0267

Cyrus 0108

Daewoo 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305

Dansai 0099

De Graaf 0069

Decca 0108, 0027

Denon 0069

Dual 0068

Dumont 0108, 0027, 0131

Dynatech 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

Elcatech 0099

Electrohome 0064

Electrophonic 0064

Emerex 0059

Emerson 0062, 0064, 0211, 0267, 0072, 0027, 0070, 0305,

1305, 1506

Ferguson 0068, 0347

Fidelity 0027

Finlandia 0108, 0131

Finlux 0108, 0027, 0069, 0131

Firstline 0064, 0072, 0070, 0099

Fisher 0074, 0131

Fuji 0062, 0060

Fujitsu 0072, 0027

Funai 0027

GE 0087, 0062, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

GEC 0108

Garrard 0027

General 0072

Go Video 0459

GoldHand 0099

GoldStar 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264

Goodmans 0064, 0027, 0099, 0305

Gradiente 0027

Graetz 0267, 0131, 0068

Granada 0108, 0131

Grandin 0064, 0027, 0099

Grundig 0108, 0099, 0253, 0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

Hanseatic 0064

Harley Davidson 0027

Harman/Kardon 0108

Harwood 0099

Hinari 0267, 0099, 0379

Hitachi 0064, 0267, 0027, 0069, 0068

Hughes 0069

Network Systems

Hypson 0099

ITT 0267, 0131, 0068

ITV 0064, 0305

Imperial 0027

Interfunk 0108

JVC 0072, 0094, 0068

Jensen 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

Kaisui 0099

Kenwood 0094, 0068

Kodak 0062, 0064

Kolin 0070, 0068

Korpel 0099

LG 0064, 0072, 0069, 0507

LXI 0064

Lenco 0305

Leyco 0099

Lloyd’s 0027

Loewe 0064, 0108, 1589

Logik 0267, 0099

Luxor 0075, 0131, 0070

M Electronic 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0267, 0070

MGN Technology 0267

MTC 0267, 0027

Magnasonic 1305

Magnavox 0062, 0066, 0108, 0027, 1808

Magnin 0267

Manesth 0072, 0099

Marantz 0062, 0108

Marta 0064

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Matsui 0375, 0379

Matsushita 0062

Medion 0375

Memorex 0062, 0064, 0075, 0066, 0074, 0267, 0027, 0131,

0334, 0375, 1264

Memphis 0099

Metz 0064, 0374, 1589

Minolta 0069

Mitsubishi 0108, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0834

Motorola 0062, 0075

Multitech 0027, 0099

Murphy 0027

Myryad 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0075, 0131, 0094, 0068

National 0253

Neckermann 0108

Nesco 0099

Newave 0064

Nikko 0064

Noblex 0267

Nokia 0267, 0131, 0068

Nordmende 0068, 0347

Oceanic 0027, 0068

Okano 0342, 0375

Olympus 0062, 0253

Optimus 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459

Orion 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506

Osaki 0064, 0027, 0099

Otto Versand 0108

Palladium 0064, 0068, 0099

Panasonic 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589

Pathe Marconi 0068

Penney 0062, 0064, 0267, 0069, 1062, 1264

Pentax 0069

Perdio 0027

Philco 0062

Philips 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208

Phonola 0108

Pilot 0064

Pioneer 0108, 0069, 0094

Polk Audio 0108

Proﬁ tronic 0267

Proline 0027

Proscan 0087, 1087

Protec 0099

Pulsar 0066

Pye 0108

Quasar 0062, 1062

Quelle 0108

RCA 0087, 0062, 0267, 0069, 0834, 1062, 1087

RadioShack 0027

Radiola 0108

Radix 0064

Randex 0064

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Realistic 0062, 0064, 0075, 0074, 0027, 0131

Reoc 0375

ReplayTV 0641, 0643

Rex 0068

Roadstar 0064, 0267, 0099, 0305

Runco 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

Saba 0068, 0347

Salora 0070

Sampo 0064, 0075

Samsung 0267, 0072, 0459

Sanky 0075, 0066

Sansui 0027, 0094, 0068, 1506

Sanyo 0074, 0267, 0131

Saville 0379

Schaub Lorenz

0027, 0131, 0068

Schneider 0108, 0027, 0099

Scott 0211, 0072, 0070

Sears 0062, 0064, 0074, 0027, 0069, 0131, 1264

Seleco 0068

Semp 0072

Sharp 0075, 0834

Shintom 0131, 0099

Shogun 0267

Siemens 0064, 0108, 0131

Silva 0064

Singer 0072, 0099

Sinudyne 0108

Sonic Blue 0641, 0643

Sontec 0064

Sony 0062, 0059, 0060, 0027, 0663, 1259

Sunkai 0375

Sunstar 0027

Suntronic 0027

Sylvania 0062, 0108, 0027, 0070, 1808

Symphonic 0027

TMK 0267

Tandy 0027, 0131

Tashiko 0064, 0027

Diamond 0795

Digitrex 0699

Emerson 0618

Tatung 0108, 0072, 0027, 0094, 0068

Teac 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669

Technics 0062, 0253

Teco 0062, 0064, 0075, 0068

Teknika 0062, 0064, 0027

Teleavia 0068

Telefunken 0068, 0347

Tenosal 0099

Tensai 0027

Thomas 0027

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Thomson 0087, 0094, 0068, 0347

Thorn 0131, 0068

Tivo 0645, 0663

Toshiba 0108, 0072, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0872

Totevision 0064, 0267

Uher 0267

Unitech 0267

Universum 0064, 0108, 0267, 0027

Vector 0072

Victor 0094, 0068

Video Concepts 0072

Videomagic 0064

Videosonic 0267

Villain 0027

Wards 0087, 0062, 0075, 0074, 0108, 0267, 0027, 0069,

0099

White Westinghouse 0099

XR-1000 0062, 0027, 0099

Yamaha 0068

Yamishi 0099

Yokan 0099

Yoko 0267

Zenith 0066, 0060, 0027, 1506

DVD

Source button name : DVD

Brand name Setup code

MARANTZ DVD1 0001

MARANTZ DVD2 0002

Acoustic Solutions 0757

Alba 0744

Amstrad 0740

Apex Digital 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127

Blaupunkt 0744

Blue Parade 0598

Bush 0740

Centrex 0699

Clatronic 0815

CyberHome 0741

DVD2000 0548

Daewoo 0811, 0797

Dansai 0797

Decca 0797

Denon 0517

Enterprise 0618

Fisher 0697

GE 0549, 0744

Go Video 0742

GoldStar 0768

Gradiente 0678

Greenhill 0744

Grundig 0566

Hitachi 0600, 0691

Hiteker 0699

DVD

Source button name : DVD

Brand name Setup code

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

Kenwood 0517, 0561

Koss 0678

LG 0768

Limit 0795

Magnavox 0530, 0702

Memorex 0858

MiCO 0750

Microsoft 0549

Mintek 0744

Mitsubishi 0548

Mustek 0757

Nesa 0744

Onkyo 0530

Oritron 0678

Palsonic 0699

Panasonic 0517, 0659, 1389

Philips 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881

Pioneer 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659

Polk Audio 0566

Proscan 0549

Qwestar 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

Rotel 0650

SM Electronic 0757

Samsung 0600

Sanyo 0697

Sharp 0657

Sherwood 0797

Shinsonic 0560

Slim Art 0811

Sony 0560, 0891

Sylvania 0702

Tatung 0797

Teac 0598, 0744

Technics 0517

Theta Digital 0598

Thomson 0549

Toshiba 0530

Urban Concepts 0530

XBox 0549

Yamaha 0517, 0566, 0572

Zenith 0530, 0618, 0768

Zeus 0811

DIRECT BUTTON

FUNCTIONS

Source button name : AMP

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 AUTO SELECT AUTO SURROUND

SELECT DOLBY MODE

3 DTS SELECT DTS MODE

4 EX/ES SELECT EX/ES

5 DIRECT SELECT PURE DIRECT

PAGE 2 1 MCH-ST SELECT MULTI CHANNEL

STEREO

2 STEREO SELECT STEREO MODE

3 VIRTUA SELECT VIRTUAL MODE

4 CS-

SELECT CS-

MODE

5 HT-EQ –

PAGE 3 1 NIGHT NIGHT MODE ON/OFF

2 BASS + BASS +

3 BASS - BASS -

4 TREB + TREBLE +

5TREB - TREBLE -

PAGE 4 1 MULTI MULTI ROOM ON/OFF

2 M-SPKR MULTI SPEAKER ON/OFF

3 A/D SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL

4 V-OFF VIDEO OFF

5 AUDIO –

Source button name : TUNER

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 FM SELECT FM

2 AM SELECT AM

3 XM/DAB SELECT XM RADIO

4 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO

5 BAND SELECT RADIO BAND

PAGE 2 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP

2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN

3 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO

4 P-SCAN SELECT PRESET SCAN

5 P-INFO SHOW PRESET INFORMATION

PAGE 3 1 DISP DISPLAY

European 2 PTY RDS PTY

model only 3 AF RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY

4 STM RDS STATION MODE

5 DWR RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE

PAGE 4 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP

2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN

3 DISP XM/RDS DISPLAY

4 CAT + CATEGORY SEARCH UP

5 CAT - CATEGORY SEARCH DOWN

Source button name : DVD

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 MENU SELECTS MAIN MENU

2 AUDIO SELECT LANGUAGES

3 SUB-T SELECT SUB TITLE

4 10+ DIGIT ENTRY +10

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 SETUP SELECTS SETUP MENU

2 ANGLE SELECTS ANGLE

3 OSD

ACTIVATES ON SCREEN DISPLAY

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 SLOW SLOW FORWARD

2 L-PLAY LAST PLAY

3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY

4 REPEAT REPEAT MODE

5 A/B REPEAT A TO B

PAGE 4 1 RETURN RETURN TO MENU

2 T/C TITLE AND CHAPTER

3 3-D SURROUND ON/OFF

4 TITLE SELECTS TITLE MENU

5 ZOOM ZOOM MODE ON/OFF

Source button name : CD

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 DISC + CD CHANGER NEXT DISC

2 DISC - CD CHANGER PREVIOUS DISC

3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY

4 REPEAT REPEAT

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 TEXT ACTIVATE TEXT FUNCTION

2 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN

3 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 DISC 1 CD CHANGER DISC 1

2 DISC 2 CD CHANGER DISC 2

3 DISC 3 CD CHANGER DISC 3

4 DISC 4 CD CHANGER DISC 4

5 DISC 5 CD CHANGER DISC 5

PAGE 4 1 UNIT SELECT UNIT No.

2 TITL-S SELECT TITLE SEARCH

3 TRACK SELECT TRACK No.

4 CATGRY SELECT CATEGORY

5 P-MODE SELECT PLAY MODE

Source button name : VCR

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 TV/VCR SELECT TV/VCR

2 2XPLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK

SPEED

3 SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED

4 STILL STILL FRAME

5 EJECT EJECT

PAGE 2 1 OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING

2 AUDIO SELECT AUDIO MODE

3 SKIP

SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 VIS + VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT

2 VIS-

VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

Source button name : CDR

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 INPUT SELECT INPUT SOURCE

2 INCR INCREMENTS TRACK No.

3 SYNC-R ACTIVATE SYNCRO

RECORDING

4 PROG ACTIVATE PROGRAM MODE

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL

2 FINAL FINALIZES(WRITES TOC)

3 BLANK RECORDS BLANK

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 BLANK RECORDS BLANK

2 REPEAT ACTIVATE REPEAT MODE

Source button name : TAPE

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 TAPE-A SELECT TAPE DECK A

2 TAPE-B SELECT TAPE DECK B

3 DIR AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION

4 TIME TIME DISPLAY

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

Source button name : MD

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 REPEAT SELECTS REPEAT MODE

2 SHUFLE SELECTS SHUFFLE PLAY

3 DISP SELECTS DISPLAY MODE

4 EDIT SELECT EDIT MODE

5 EJECT EJECT

PAGE 2 1 SP/LP SELECTS SP/LP MODE

2 DELETE SELECTS DELETE

3 ENTER SELECTS ENTER

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 MARKER SELECTS AUTO MARKER

2 PROG SELECTS PROGRAM MODE

3 SYNC-R SYNCRO REC

4 CHAR SELECTS CHARACTER MODE

Source button name : AUX 2

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT AUX1

2 REPEAT SELECT AUX2

3 MODE SELECT AUX3

4 SORT SELECT NET

5 MUTE

PAGE 2 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD

2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE

Source button name : AUX 1

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT SHUFFLE PLAY

2 REPEAT SELECT REPEAT PLAY

3 MODE

CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE

4 SORT SORT DATA BASE

5 MUTE MUTE ON/OFF (TOGGLE)

PAGE 2 1 ALBUM+ NEXT ALBUM

2 ALBUM- PREVIOUS ALBUM

3 LIST+ NEXT PLAY LIST

4 LIST- PREVIOUS PLAY LIST

PAGE 3 1 ARTIST SORT ORDER (ARTIST)

2 ALBUM SORT ORDER (ALBUM)

3 SONG SORT ORDER (SONG)

4 GENRE SORT ORDER (GENRE)

5 P-LIST SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST)

PAGE 4 1 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD

2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE

www.marantz.com

You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

is a registered trademark.

Printed in China 06/2006 00M05CW851250 ecmf-d

Stand-by lampje is flashing. Stroom er al af gehad. Ook multi / speaker A/B al ingedrukt. Blijft flashing Gesteld op 1-9-2020 om 19:34
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

lees eerst de handleiding door;
controleer of uw vraag al eerder door iemand anders is gesteld;
probeer uw vraag zo duidelijk mogelijk te stellen;
heeft u een probleem en al geprobeerd om dit op te lossen, vermeld dit erbij aub;
heeft u een oplossing gekregen van een bezoeker dan horen wij dat graag in dit forum;
wilt u een reactie geven op een vraag of antwoord, gebruik dan niet dit formulier maar klik op de knop 'reageer op deze vraag';
uw vraag wordt direct op de website gezet; vermijd daarom persoonlijke gegevens in te vullen;

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Marantz SR-7001 bij:

nieuwe vragen en antwoorden
nieuwe handleidingen

U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Marantz SR-7001 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3,87 mb groot.

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.

Marantz SR-7001 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info

Marantz SR-7001 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info